Академический Документы
Профессиональный Документы
Культура Документы
Date
Amdt No
Date
Amdt No
Date
DISTRIBUTION
(See page v)
FOR THE ATTENTION OF ALL SCALE HOLDERS
Units requiring an increase or decrease to their scale should apply to Army Publications,
Army Media & Comm, c/o Army Headquarters, Zone 2, IDL 25, 2nd Floor Blenheim Bldg,
Marlborough Lines, ANDOVER, SP11 8HTwho will arrange for a revised distribution. Any
request to exceed the scale must be supported by a written justification which is to be
referred by Army Publications to CD Combat for approval.
ii
2016
iii
iv
FOREWORD
1.
Any person wishing to propose amendments to this pamphlet is invited to
write to Combat Publications, Waterloo Lines, WARMINSTER, BA12 0DJ. Any such
proposals will be given consideration and, if there is a requirement for them, the
appropriate amendments will be prepared and published.
2.
This pamphlet supersedes Infantry Training, Volume I, Army Operational
Shooting Policy, Volume 1 Personal Weapons 2015 (Army Code No. 71810) which
should now be destroyed.
3.
This pamphlet is also available on the British Army Electronic Battle Box
(BAeBB). Access is available via the latest edition of the Army Official Publications
DVD or via the web version on the Intranet. Access the web version through the Army
Portal, then under Reference. Follow the links to access this pamphlet under Combat.
Combat Publications is then sub-divided under the appropriate volumes.
DISTRIBUTION
30 copies each
5 copies each
40 copies
40 copies each
5 copies
30 copies each
10 copies each
3 copies each
300 copies
100 copies
160 copies
5 copies
40 copies each
40 copies
500 copies
5 copies
1 copy each
20 copies each
10 copies each
5 copies each
v
vi
1 copy each
2 copies
10 copies
10 copies
2 copies each
2 copies each
7 copies
5 copies
50 copies each
5 copies each
200 copies
5 copies
2 copies each
10 copies
5 copies each
2 copies
150 copies each
2 copies each
Notes:
1.
The previous system of A to F scaling is being phased out for GSPs as new or
revised publications are issued. Units will in future receive a specific initial entitlement
as decided by the sponsor.
2.
Requests for additional copies must be fully justified and are to be made to
Army Media Comm (AMC), Publications in the first instance. Requests will fall into one
of three categories and are to be specified:
a. Replacement Issue. To bring units back up to entitlement as a result of
loss or damage.
b. Supplementary Issue. This applies when a units role or circumstance
changes necessitating an increase to the original entitlement.
c. New Issue. This is where a unit has not previously been scaled for a
particular publication.
3.
Units are reminded that all publications are accountable documents and their
issue and receipt should be the responsibility of a nominated officer or SNCO.
vii
viii
CONTENTS
Page
Foreword ....................................................................................................... v
Distribution...................................................................................................... v
References And Associated Publications........................................................ xii
Introduction...................................................................................................... xiii
CHAPTER 1
Operational Shooting Policy and its Implementation (Personal Weapons)..... 1-1
CHAPTER 2
Management of Shooting Training (Personal Weapons)................................. 2-1
CHAPTER 3
The Rifle ....................................................................................................... 3-1
CHAPTER 4
The Light Support Weapon (LSW).................................................................. 4-1
CHAPTER 5
Infantry Section Designated Marksman (SDM (LSW)).................................... 5-1
CHAPTER 6
Sharpshooter Rifle 7.62MM L129A1............................................................... 6-1
CHAPTER 7
The Light Machine Gun (LMG)........................................................................ 7-1
CHAPTER 8
Service PistoL.................................................................................................. 8-1
CHAPTER 9
Reserved
CHAPTER 10
Transition to Live Firing Tactical Training........................................................ 10-1
ix
Page
CHAPTER 11
Code No.
Title
A
71855
DCC Training Volume IV,
Ranges, Pamphlet No. 21, Training Regulations
for Armoured Fighting Vehicles, Infantry Weapons
and Pyrotechnics.
B
D
72014
DCC Training Volume II, Skill at Arms
(Personal Weapons), Sharpshooter Assault Rifle
7.62mm L129A1
E
71996
DCC Training Volume II, Skill at Arms
(Personal Weapons), General Service Pistol
L131A1.
F
71850
Operational Shooting Policy, Volume 2,
Section & Platoon Weapons.
G
71852
Operational Shooting Policy, Volume 3,
Support Weapons.
xi
xii
INTRODUCTION
1.
Aim. The aim of the OSP is: To train all personnel and maintain them at
a standard where they can apply marksmanship principles and are capable in the
application of effective small arms fire in accordance with their operational role.
2.
Purpose. The purpose of the OSP is to detail a progressive regime of shoots
designed to introduce novice firers to shooting, to build their confidence and skills and
then to train the battle shot for likely operational tasks. It also provides a means to
assess whether minimum standards are being achieved in order to allow the individual
firer and the chain of command to take appropriate action. Marksmanship and the
effective application of fire are no longer the preserve of the Infantry. In the hybrid
nature of the modern operational environment, it is a fundamental and essential All
Arms skill.
3.
Success. Shooting is not a skill that responds well to uneven practice.
Regular and routine shooting helps to maintain standards and provides a platform for
further development all personnel should complete skill at arms training on a regular
basis. Firers confidence is a major factor in both accuracy and effectiveness; this can
only be achieved through competency which is a product of the correct culture. The
key criterion for good shooting is the correct cultural approach.
4.
Standards. Marksmanship and the effective application of fire is a battle
winning factor. It is a command responsibility to ensure that sufficient training
opportunities are available and an individual duty to achieve the highest possible
standards. Required shooting standards are detailed in this volume. These represent
the basic minimum and higher achievement standards and are to be encouraged.
5.
Characteristics. The characteristics of the shooting training detailed in OSP
are as follows:
a. It commences with initial training and is to be continued regularly and
routinely thereafter.
b. It is a universal skill with the standards to be achieved by different force
elements related to role.
c. It is progressive and developmental, allowing firers to build on their
skills with coaching support if required; at the higher levels it combines skill
at arms and marksmanship with field craft and tactics on an individual and
collective basis.
d. It is evolutionary and will change as the nature of conflict, technology
and the operational requirement dictates.
xiii
xiv
CHAPTER 1
OPERATIONAL SHOOTING POLICY AND ITS
IMPLEMENTATION
(PERSONAL WEAPONS)
Background
CONTENTS
BACKGROUND 1-1
SHOOTING POLICY
1-1
1-2
OPERATIONAL SHOOTING
REQUIREMENTS (OSR)
1-2
OPERATIONAL MARKSMANSHIP
STANDARDS (OMS)
1-3
SIMULATION 1-4
GUIDANCE TO COMMANDERS
1-4
1-8
0103. A new approach to the training and testing of weapon handling and shooting
was introduced in the first version of the Army Operational Shooting Policy (AOSP)
not only to meet operational shooting requirements; but in doing so to integrate small
arms simulation and technology.
Shooting Policy
0104. Army Shooting Policy Paper (ASPP). This policy was endorsed by the
Executive Committee of the Army Board (ECAB) in the ASPP. This paper addressed
both the needs of operational small arms shooting and competition shooting.
Competition shooting is relevant to operational requirements and details have been
included in Chapters 13 & 14 of this pamphlet.
0105. Shooting Requirements. In establishing operational shooting policy the
ASPP set out two key principles:
a. All shooting practices and standards should be directly related to the
operational requirement for each Arm or Service.
b. There should be a distinction between the common standard of shooting
required for all trained service personnel and that required of trained (combat)
infantrymen. (Definition: An Infantry officer who has completed Platoon
Commanders Battle Course (PCBC); an Infantry soldier who has completed
Infantry Phase 2 Training (Combat Infantrymans Course from Jan 93)).
1-1
The DCC Role. Service personnel employed in the DCC Role must be able to react
quickly and to fire accurately to kill or suppress an enemy to the limits of the battle
range of his personal weapon, or at close quarters, from different static positions,
on the move and from cover. Four-man fire teams must be able to kill or suppress
an enemy in defence and in offensive operations at battle ranges to 600 metres.
The BCC Role. Service personnel employed in the Basic Close Combat Role
must be able to fire accurately to kill or suppress an enemy as an individual or as a
member of a four-man fire team out to 300 metres.
Base Location. Service personnel employed in a base location who will remain
inside the confines of a secure area e.g. Main Operating Base (MOB) must be able
to fire accurately out to 100 metres.
0113. The conditions of these OSR raise several issues within the context of the
shooting package. Foremost of these is the re-definition of personal and alternate
personal weapon marksmanship standards.
Operational Marksmanship Standards
0114. OMS have been determined for service personnel employed in the DCC Role
the BCC Role and the Base Location and will be evaluated in the Annual Combat
Marksmanship Test (ACMT) for each role.
0115. The Personal Weapon Concept is discussed in Chapter 2. In summary, there
is one OMS per weapon system, dependent on the role being employed in either the
DCC Role the BCC Role or in the Base Location. The weapons concerned are:
a. Rifle L85A2 (both Optic and Iron Sight) issued to all Arms and Services
as a personal weapon.
(1) The L22A1 Carbine is categorised as a Rifle and issued to specific
personnel as a personal weapon.
(2) Rifle L85A2 with L17A2 Underslung Grenade Launcher (UGL)
fitted issued to designated personnel, as a personal weapon. Firers are
to achieve the OMS as per the Rifle.
b. Light Support Weapon L86A2 (LSW) issued to designated personnel,
as a personal weapon.
c. Light Machine Gun (LMG) issued to DCC designated gunners as a
personal weapon.
d.
1-3
0116. Should personnel who are employed in the Basic Close Combat Role and
issued with a rifle and iron sight be upgraded to an optic sight, they must still achieve
the standard of the Basic Close Combat Role.
0117.
The detail of all ACMTs is contained in the specific personal weapon chapter.
Simulation
0118. The integration of small arms simulation equipment Dismounted Close
Combat Trainer (DCCT) is fundamental to training the battle shot. It provides the
vehicle for accessible and cost-effective remedial, refresher and progressive shooting
training and gives service personnel the opportunity to practice skills before firing
live. Furthermore, certain Rifle LF lessons are DCCT predominantly. It is essential,
therefore, that all units have access to these systems and ensure personnel are
trained in its use so it can be utilised to maximum effect.
0119. Small Arms Range Target System (SARTS). Vital shooting and coaching
information can be gained with time, manpower and ammunition saved by the correct
use of SARTS. It permits one to one coaching and supervision with Grouping,
Zeroing and Elementary Application of Fire lessons on both ETR and CGR ranges. In
Advanced Application of Fire lessons SARTS can be used to indicate to the firer and
coach where shots are hitting or missing the target. RCOs are to ensure their coaches
are thoroughly familiar with SARTS before any LF lessons begin.
Guidance To Commanders
0120. Commanders are responsible for training their unit in accordance with their
deployment status. Key to operational success is the standard of a units shooting.
Detailed instructions on shooting training are to be found in the following chapters
of OSP and will be of primary use to training staff. The aim of this short section is to
provide a brief overview of OSP and to offer guidance to Commanders on how they
can train their units in this fundamental battle winning skill as part of both foundation
and deployment training. There are five stages to training the battle shot each of which
is sequential with progression dependent on achieving satisfactory standards at each
level. The five stages are:
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Stage 4
Stage 5
1-4
0121. Each Stage contains a number of LF lessons, some of which are discretionary,
others must be passed at a specified standard. All are designed to be progressive and
developmental. Coaching will improve standards and should be given to all firers,
but will be of specific benefit to those who have difficulty in applying marksmanship
principles to achieve required standards. Safety is a major factor in shooting training,
but it should not be regarded as a restrictive constraint. Much productive shooting
training can be conducted on a SA (B) (90) qualification, including the FMT for other
Arms and Services. The tables at the end of this chapter detail the mandatory and
objective shoots to be completed as part of initial, foundation and high readiness
training.
0122. LFTT, in particular, must be conducted in a progressive manner. This allows
for lessons to be learned during low level, simple activities before moving to exercises
of greater complexity.
0123. Additional guidance is available from SASC Advisors or from HQ SASC,
Warminster. The first steps to ensuring high standards of individual marksmanship
and an operationally effective unit are the correct priority of shooting training, effective
coaching, progressive development of firers, regular shooting activity and forward
planning. These generate the culture required to develop and sustain good shooting
standards at individual and unit level. Most importantly, shooting must receive the
command attention it deserves.
0124. Concept in Detail. The concept of Training the Battle Shot is founded on
inter-dependence. Stages are mutually reinforcing. Service personnel should not
move on to another stage until they have attained the standards required.
0125. Stage 1 Preliminary Grouping and Zeroing. Service personnel are
to be trained to group consistently to the required standard from all firing positions.
Training will progress from DCCT where basic weapon lessons will be confirmed
and faults in applying marksmanship principles corrected to full bore shoots at 25
metres. No personnel are to zero their personal weapon until they can achieve the
required grouping standard. A firers success in applying fire is directly related to
their ability to group consistently. They are unlikely to pass the Annual Combat
Marksmanship Test in Stage 3 until they can do so.
0126. Stage 2 Application of Fire. The firer is then to progress to shooting at
longer ranges in conditions relevant to OSR and from all firing positions required in the
OMS. They will be taught how to overcome the effects of wind and extremes of light.
They will also be introduced to different target types and be trained in snap and rapid
shooting, and in quickly adopting fire positions. This stage progresses from firing at
targets superimposed on witness screens to silhouette targets.
0127. Stage 3 Annual Combat Marksmanship Test. The OMS for all service
personnel are to be tested in Annual Combat Marksmanship Tests. There are two
elements to the requirement:
a. Weapon Handling Tests (WHT). All service personnel are to complete
their WHTs twice a year for all weapons they will be required to operate.
1-5
1-7
Validation
0134. The results of ACMTs are to be formally recorded for every individual. Units
are to hold statistics containing the following additional data:
a.
b.
c.
0135. In addition, Regular and Reserve units are to record the results of TLFTT
shoots as appropriate.
0136. Records and statistics of all unit shooting training and test results with
IFFC records for Infantry battalions will form part of Operational Deployment
Records (ODR) returns.
Exercising Troops
0137. The exercising troops are to be sufficiently trained to cope with the demands
of the exercise. They are to be trained and tested to ensure competency on all
weapons and pyrotechnics they may use during such training. This training is to be
documented and the testing carried out by an appropriately qualified instructor is to be
recorded. The progression of training is detailed in the Commanders Guides.
0138. The mandatory requirements specified need not be completed in a single
exercise period. The minimum requirement is that they are completed no more than
the specified period prior to the exercise and that the Exercise Director and/or Senior
Planning Officer is satisfied that the troops remain competent. Weapon Handling Tests
(WHT) are to be successfully completed no more than 6 months prior to the exercise.
0139. Exceptions to these requirements are outlined in Military Annual Training
Tests (MATTs), Policy Updates and Operational Mounting Instructions. For example:
a. The Mission Specific Training Requirement is that MATT 1 (WHTs and
ACMT) are to have been completed within the previous six calendar months
prior to deployment.
b. Post OP currency, individuals that return from an operational tour during
the period 1 Oct to 31 Mar are deemed to be MATTs current until 1 Apr the
following year.
c. If, for any reason, an individuals ACMT currency lapses because the
tour lasts in excess of six months or a unit are redeployed or extended in
deployment then the individuals ACMT will remain extant until the end of the
tour date, up to a maximum of 12 months from the deployment date.
1-8
Objective
Discretionary
Mandatory
= The mandated minimum standard to meet generic operational training requirements, fully re sourced.
Objective
= The objective standard to meet generic operational training requirements, conducted as resources allow.
Discretionary = Conducted to support a specific training requirement, as resources allow.
Ser
Practice
Range
RCO
Qual
BCC
DCC
Nil
WHT
WHT
WHT
DCCT
LF1
LF1
25m
LF2
LF2
DCCT
LF3
LF3
25m
LF4
LF4
WHT Zeroing
Nil
WHT
WHT
LF5 Zeroing
25m Zeroing Procedure with Retests as
required
25m
LF5
LF5
DCCT
PRAC 1
PRAC 1
10
11
Remarks
A or B
LF6
LF6
15 to 3m
A or B
LF7
LF7
15 to 3m
A or B
LF8
LF8
12
15 to 3m
A or B
LF9
LF9
13
Nil
WHT
WHT
14
DCCT
LF10
LF10
15
100m
LF11
LF11
16
200m
LF12
LF12
DCC Only
300m
17
DCCT
LF13
LF13
18
100m
LF14
LF14
1-9
19
20
21
200m
DCC Only
300m
LF15
LF15
DCCT
PRAC 2
PRAC 2
100m
LF16
22
200m
LF17
23
300m
LF18
24
DCCT
25
ACMT
200m
300m
200m
Annual
CBRN
Annual
CBRN
IBSR
IBS
IBS
26
27
PRAC 3
ACMT
(BCC)
STAGE 4 TLFTT
28
29
Automatic Fire
DCCT/
ETR/
LFTTA
Auto Fire
Auto Fire
30
Moving Targets
DCCT/
MMTTR
Moving
Target
Moving
Target
31
LNV
ETR/GR/
CGR
LNV
LNV
32
25m/ ETR/
GR/ CGR
NVD
NVD
33
ETR
FMT
STAGE 5 LFTT
34
LFTTA
Sect Def
(Day)
Sect Def
(Day)
35
LFTTA
Sect Def
(Night)
Sect Def
(Night)
36
IBSR/
LFTTA
IBS/Ind
CQB
IBS/Ind
CQB
37
LFTTA
Ind F&M
(Day)
Ind F&M
(Day)
38
LFTTA
(FTA)
(Day)
(FTA)
(Day)
39
FTA (Night)
LFTTA
FTA
(Night)
FTA
(Night)
40
LFTTA
Sect Attack
(Day)
Sect Attack
(Day)
41
LFTTA
Sect Attack
(Night)
Sect Attack
(Night)
1-10
Objective
Discretionary
Mandatory
= The mandated minimum standard to meet generic operational training requirements, fully re sourced.
Objective
= The objective standard to meet generic operational training requirements, conducted as resources allow.
Discretionary = Conducted to support a specific training requirement, as resources allow.
Ser
1
Practice
WHT
Range
RCO
Qual
BCC
Nil
WHT
Remarks
25m
LF1
25m
LF2
100m
LF3
400m
LF4
400m
LF5
ACMT
400m
ACMT
200m
Annual
CBRN
Practice
WHT
Range
RCO
Qual
DCC
Nil
WHT
Remarks
25m
LF1
25m
LF2
100m
LF3
400m
LF4
400m
LF5
400m
LF6
600m
LF7
ACMT
600m
ACMT
10
600m
Annual
CBRN
1-11
Objective
Discretionary
Mandatory
= The mandated minimum standard to meet generic operational training requirements, fully re sourced.
Objective
= The objective standard to meet generic operational training requirements, conducted as resources allow.
Discretionary = Conducted to support a specific training requirement, as resources allow.
Ser
1
Practice
WHT
Range
RCO
Qual
DCC
Nil
WHT
100m
LF1
LF1 Grouping/Zeroing
Zeroing at 100m all positions
300m
LF2
600m
LF3
300m
LF4
600m
LF5
ACMT
600m
ACMT
200m
Annual
CBRN
1-12
Remarks
Objective
Discretionary
Mandatory
= The mandated minimum standard to meet generic operational training requirements, fully re sourced.
Objective
= The objective standard to meet generic operational training requirements, conducted as resources allow.
Discretionary = Conducted to support a specific training requirement, as resources allow.
Ser
1
Practice
WHT
Range
RCO
Qual
DCC
Nil
WHT
Remarks
LF1 Introduction
Familiarisation of controlled bursts
25m
LF1
LF2 Grouping
Grouping at 100m
100m
LF2
LF3 Zeroing
Zeroing at 100m
100m
LF3
200m
LF4
400m
LF5
400m
LF6
ACMT
400m
ACMT
300m
Annual
CBRN
1-13
Objective
Discretionary
Mandatory
= The mandated minimum standard to meet generic operational training requirements, fully re sourced.
Objective
= The objective standard to meet generic operational training requirements, conducted as resources allow.
Discretionary = Conducted to support a specific training requirement, as resources allow.
Ser
1
Practice
WHT
Range
RCO
Qual
User
Nil
WHT
25m
LF1
LF1 Introduction
Grouping at 10m all positions
25m
LF2
25m
LF3
25m
LF4
25m
LF5
25m
LF6
ACMT
25m
ACMT
25m
Annual
CBRN
1-14
rapid
Remarks
Objective
Discretionary
Mandatory
= The mandated minimum standard to meet generic operational training requirements, fully re sourced.
Objective
= The objective standard to meet generic operational training requirements, conducted as resources allow.
Discretionary = Conducted to support a specific training requirement, as resources allow.
Ser
Stage
1 and 2
Zeroing/
Application
of Fire
3
ACMT
Practice
WHT
Range
RCO
Qual
BCC
DCC
WHT
WHT
Nil
SAA
Instr
ACMT Preparation
ETR/GR/
CGR
ETR/GR/
CGR
Base
Location
Rifle ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
ACMT (BCC)
ACMT Prep
ACMT
(DCC)
LSW ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
Sharpshooter ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
LMG ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
10
25m
User
11
ETR/GR/
CGR
Annual CBRN
IBSR
IBS
IBS
12
4
TLFTT
Remarks
User
13
Automatic Fire
Auto Fire
Auto Fire
14
Moving Targets
DCCT/
MMTTR
Moving
Target
Moving
Target
15
LNV
ETR/GR/
CGR
LNV
LNV
16
25m/
ETR/GR/
CGR
NVD
NVD
17
25m/
ETR/GR/
CGR
LA
LA
18
ETR
19
LFTTA
LFTTA
S/Veh
S/Veh
LFTTA
M/Veh
M/Veh
22
DCCT
MTLR
MTLR
23
DCCT
LRS
LRS
20
21
4
TLFTT
(Spec to Role)
FMT
Adv
As per Operational Mounting
Instruction.
1-15
25m
CQM
LMG Only
25
Accelerated Fire
25m
CQM
LMG Only
26
Failure to Stop
25m
CQM
LMG Only
27
Multiple Tgts
25m
CQM
LMG Only
28
The Transition
25m
CQM
CQM
29
25m
CQM
CQM
30
25m
CQM
CQM
31
Moving Target
DCCT
CQM
CQM
SectDef (Day)
LFTTA
SectDef
(Day)
SectDef
(Day)
SectDef (Night)
LFTTA
SectDef
(Night)
SectDef
(Night)
34
PlDef (Day)
LFTTA
Pl
Def (Day)
Pl
Def (Day)
35
PlDef (Night)
LFTTA
Pl Def
(Night)
Pl Def
(Night)
24
CQM
32
5
LFTT
Defence
Exercises
33
IBSR/
LFTTA
IBS/Ind
CQB
IBS/Ind
CQB
LFTTA
Ind F&M
(Day)
Ind F&M
(Day)
38
LFTTA
(FTA)
(Day)
(FTA)
(Day)
39
LFTTA
Sect Attack
(Day
Sect Attack
(Day)
40
Pl Attack (Day)
LFTTA
36
5
LFTT
Offensive
Exercises
(Day)
37
Pl Attack
(Day)
41
42
5
FTA (Night)
LFTT Offensive
Exercises
(NIGHT)
Sect Attack (Night)
43
Pl Attack (Night)
LFTTA
FTA
(Night)
FTA
(Night)
LFTTA
Sect Attack
(Night)
Sect Attack
(Night)
LFTTA
Pl Attack
(Night)
1-16
Objective
Discretionary
Mandatory
= The mandated minimum standard to meet generic operational training requirements, fully re sourced.
Objective
= The objective standard to meet generic operational training requirements, conducted as resources allow.
Discretionary = Conducted to support a specific training requirement, as resources allow.
Ser
Stage
1 and 2
Zeroing/
Application
of Fire
3
ACMT
Practice
WHT
Range
RCO
Qual
BCC
DCC
WHT
WHT
Nil
SAA
Instr
ACMT Preparation
ETR/GR/
CGR
ETR/GR/
CGR
Base
Location
Rifle ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
ACMT (BCC)
ACMT Prep
ACMT
(DCC)
LSW ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
Sharpshooter ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
LMG ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
10
25m
User
11
ETR/GR/
CGR
Annual CBRN
IBSR
IBS
IBS
12
4
TLFTT
Remarks
User
13
Automatic Fire
Auto Fire
Auto Fire
14
Moving Targets
DCCT/
MMTTR
Moving
Target
Moving
Target
15
LNV
ETR/GR/
CGR
LNV
LNV
16
25m/
ETR/GR/
CGR
NVD
NVD
17
25m/
ETR/GR/
CGR
LA
LA
18
ETR
19
LFTTA
LFTTA
S/Veh
S/Veh
LFTTA
M/Veh
M/Veh
22
DCCT
MTLR
MTLR
23
DCCT
LRS
LRS
20
21
4
TLFTT
(Spec to Role)
FMT
Adv
As per Operational Mounting
Instruction.
1-17
25m
CQM
LMG Only
25
Accelerated Fire
25m
CQM
LMG Only
26
Failure to Stop
25m
CQM
LMG Only
27
Multiple Tgts
25m
CQM
LMG Only
28
The Transition
25m
CQM
CQM
29
25m
CQM
CQM
30
25m
CQM
CQM
31
Moving Target
DCCT
CQM
CQM
SectDef (Day)
LFTTA
SectDef
(Day)
SectDef
(Day)
SectDef (Night)
LFTTA
SectDef
(Night)
SectDef
(Night)
34
PlDef (Day)
LFTTA
Pl Def
(Day)
Pl Def
(Day)
35
PlDef (Night)
LFTTA
Pl Def
(Night)
Pl Def
(Night)
IBSR/
LFTTA
IBS/Ind
CQB
IBS/Ind
CQB
LFTTA
Ind F&M
(Day)
Ind F&M
(Day)
38
LFTTA
FTA
(Day)
FTA
(Day)
39
LFTTA
Sect Attack
(Day)
Sect Attack
(Day)
40
Pl Attack (Day)
LFTTA
Pl Attack
(Day)
41
LFTTA
Coy Attack
(Day)
42
BG Attack (Day)
LFTTA
BG Attack
(Day)
FTA (Night)
LFTTA
FTA
(Night)
FTA
(Night)
LFTTA
Sect Attack
(Night)
Sect Attack
(Night)
45
Pl Attack (Night)
LFTTA
Pl Attack
(Night)
46
LFTTA
Coy Attack
(Night)
47
BG Attack (Night)
LFTTA
BG Attack
(Night)
24
32
33
36
37
43
44
CQM
5
LFTT
Defence
Exercises
5
LFTT
Offensive
Exercises
(Day)
5
LFTT
Offensive
Exercises
(NIGHT)
1-18
Objective
Discretionary
Mandatory
= The mandated minimum standard to meet generic operational training requirements, fully re sourced.
Objective
= The objective standard to meet generic operational training requirements, conducted as resources allow.
Discretionary = Conducted to support a specific training requirement, as resources allow.
Ser
Stage
1 and 2
Zeroing/
Application
of Fire
3
ACMT
Practice
WHT
Range
RCO
Qual
BCC
DCC
WHT
WHT
Nil
SAA
Instr
ACMT Preparation
ETR/GR/
CGR
ETR/GR/
CGR
Base
Location
Rifle ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
ACMT (BCC)
ACMT Prep
ACMT
(DCC)
LSW ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
Sharpshooter ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
LMG ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
10
25m
User
11
ETR/GR/
CGR
Annual CBRN
IBSR
IBS
IBS
12
4
TLFTT
Remarks
User
13
Automatic Fire
Auto Fire
Auto Fire
14
Moving Targets
DCCT/
MMTTR
Moving
Target
Moving
Target
15
LNV
ETR/GR/
CGR
LNV
LNV
16
25m/
ETR/GR/
CGR
NVD
NVD
17
25m/
ETR/GR/
CGR
LA
LA
18
ETR
19
LFTTA
LFTTA
S/Veh
S/Veh
LFTTA
M/Veh
M/Veh
22
DCCT
MTLR
MTLR
23
DCCT
LRS
LRS
20
21
4
TLFTT
(Spec to Role)
FMT
Adv
As per Operational Mounting
Instruction.
1-19
25m
CQM
LMG Only
25
Accelerated Fire
25m
CQM
LMG Only
26
Failure to Stop
25m
CQM
LMG Only
27
Multiple Tgts
25m
CQM
LMG Only
28
The Transition
25m
CQM
CQM
29
25m
CQM
CQM
30
25m
CQM
CQM
31
Moving Target
DCCT
CQM
CQM
SectDef (Day)
LFTTA
SectDef
(Day)
SectDef
(Day)
SectDef (Night)
LFTTA
SectDef
(Night)
SectDef
(Night)
34
PlDef (Day)
LFTTA
Pl Def
(Day)
35
PlDef (Night)
LFTTA
Pl Def
(Night)
IBSR/
LFTTA
IBS/Ind
CQB
IBS/Ind
CQB
LFTTA
Ind F&M
(Day)
Ind F&M
(Day)
38
LFTTA
FTA
(Day)
FTA
(Day)
39
LFTTA
Sect Attack
(Day)
Sect Attack
(Day)
40
Pl Attack (Day)
LFTTA
Pl Attack
(Day)
41
LFTTA
Coy Attack
(Day)
FTA (Night)
LFTTA
FTA
(Night)
FTA
(Night)
LFTTA
Sect Attack
(Night)
Sect Attack
(Night)
44
Pl Attack (Night)
LFTTA
Pl Attack
(Night)
45
LFTTA
Coy Attack
(Night)
24
32
33
36
37
42
43
CQM
5
LFTT
Defence
Exercises
5
LFTT
Offensive
Exercises
(Day)
5
LFTT
Offensive
Exercises
(NIGHT)
1-20
Objective
Discretionary
Mandatory
= The mandated minimum standard to meet generic operational training requirements, fully re sourced.
Objective
= The objective standard to meet generic operational training requirements, conducted as resources allow.
Discretionary = Conducted to support a specific training requirement, as resources allow.
Ser
Practice
Range
RCO
Qual
RN
BCC
RM
DCC
Nil
WHT
WHT
Remarks
WHT
DCCT
LF1
LF1
25m
LF2
LF2
DCCT
LF3
LF3
25m
LF4
LF4
WHT Zeroing
Nil
WHT
WHT
LF5 Zeroing
25m Zeroing Procedure with Retests as
required
25m
LF5
LF5
DCCT
PRAC 1
PRAC 1
15 to 3m
A or B
LF6
LF6
10
15 to 3m
A or B
LF7
LF7
11
15 to 3m
A or B
LF8
LF8
12
15 to 3m
A or B
LF9
LF9
13
Nil
WHT
WHT
14
DCCT
LF10
LF10
15
100m
LF11
LF11
16
200m
LF12
LF12
LF13
LF13
17
DCC Only
300m
DCCT
1-21
18
100m
LF14
LF14
19
200m
DCC Only
300m
LF15
LF15
20
DCCT
PRAC 2
PRAC 2
21
100m
LF16
LF16
22
200m
LF17
LF17
23
300m
LF18
LF18
24
DCCT
PRAC 3
PRAC 3
25
ACMT
200m
ACMT
(BCC)
300m
200m
Annual
CBRN
Annual
CBRN
IBSR
IBS
IBS
26
27
STAGE 4 TLFTT
28
29
Automatic Fire
DCCT/
ETR/
LFTTA
Auto Fire
Auto Fire
30
The Transition
15 to 3m
A,B or
CQBI
CQM
CQM
31
15 to 3m
A,B or
CQBI
CQM
CQM
32
15 to 3m
A,B or
CQBI
CQM
CQM
33
Moving Targets
DCCT/
MMTTR
Moving
Target
Moving
Target
34
LNV
ETR/GR/
CGR
LNV
LNV
35
25m/ ETR/
GR/ CGR
NVD
NVD
36
25m/ ETR/
GR/ CGR
LA
LA
STAGE 5 LFTT
37
LFTTA
Sect Def
(Day)
Sect Def
(Day)
38
LFTTA
Sect Def
(Night)
Sect Def
(Night)
39
IBSR/
LFTTA
IBS/Ind
CQB
IBS/Ind
CQB
40
LFTTA
Ind F&M
(Day)
Ind F&M
(Day)
41
LFTTA
(FTA)
(Day)
(FTA)
(Day)
42
FTA (Night)
LFTTA
FTA (Night)
FTA
(Night)
1-22
43
LFTTA
Sect Attack
(Day)
44
LFTTA
Sect Attack
(Night)
45
Pl Attack (Day)
LFTTA
Pl Attack
(Day)
See note 1
46
Pl Attack (Night)
LFTTA
Pl Attack
(Night)
See note 1
Note 1: Theses additional shoots are conducted by CTCRM to allow all Mne/YOs to leave CTCRM at Operation performance
Standard (OPS) so they can join a Cdo unit anywhere in the CORM Cycle.
1-23
Objective
Discretionary
Mandatory
= The mandated minimum standard to meet generic operational training requirements, fully re sourced.
Objective
= The objective standard to meet generic operational training requirements, conducted as resources allow.
Discretionary = Conducted to support a specific training requirement, as resources allow.
Range
RCO Qual
RM
DCC
Nil
SAA Instr
WHT
ACMT Preparation
ETR/GR/
CGR
ACMT
(Prep)
Rifle ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
ACMT
(DCC)
LSW ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
Sharpshooter ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
LMG ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
25m
User
ETR/GR/
CGR
Annual
CBRN
IBSR
IBS
Ser
Stage
1 and 2
Zeroing/
Application
of Fire
3
ACMT
10
4
TLFTT
Practice
WHT
11
Automatic Fire
Auto Fire
12
Moving Targets
DCCT/
MMTTR
Moving
Target
13
LNV
ETR/GR/
CGR
LNV
14
25m/
ETR/GR/
CGR
NVD
15
25m/
ETR/GR/
CGR
16
LFTTA
LFTTA
S/Veh
LFTTA
M/Veh
19
DCCT
MTLR
20
DCCT
LRS
17
18
1-24
4
TLFTT
(Spec to Role)
Remarks
LA
Adv
As per Operational Mounting
Instruction.
25m
CQM
22
Accelerated Fire
25m
CQM
23
Failure to Stop
25m
CQM
24
Multiple Tgts
25m
CQM
25
The Transition
25m
CQM
26
25m
CQM
27
25m
CQM
28
Moving Target
DCCT
CQM
SectDef (Day)
LFTTA
SectDef
(Day)
SectDef (Night)
LFTTA
SectDef
(Night)
31
PlDef (Day)
LFTTA
Pl
Def (Day)
32
PlDef (Night)
LFTTA
Pl
Def (Night)
IBSR/
LFTTA
IBS/Ind CQB
LFTTA
Ind F&M
(Day)
35
LFTTA
(FTA) (Day)
36
LFTTA
Sect Attack
(Day)
37
Pl Attack (Day)
LFTTA
Pl Attack
(Day)
21
29
30
33
34
CQM
5
LFTT
Defence
Exercises
5
LFTT
Offensive
Exercises
(Day)
38
39
40
5
LFTT
Offensive
Exercises
(NIGHT)
FTA (Night)
LFTTA
FTA (Night)
LFTTA
Sect Attack
(Night)
Pl Attack (Night)
LFTTA
Pl Attack
(Night)
1-25
Objective
Discretionary
Mandatory
= The mandated minimum standard to meet generic operational training requirements, fully re sourced.
Objective
= The objective standard to meet generic operational training requirements, conducted as resources allow.
Discretionary = Conducted to support a specific training requirement, as resources allow.
Ser
Stage
1 and 2
Zeroing/
Application
of Fire
3
ACMT
Practice
WHT
Range
RCO
Qual
RN
BCC
RM
DCC
Nil
SAA
Instr
WHT
ACMT Preparation
ETR/GR/
CGR
ACMT Prep
Rifle ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
ACMT (BCC)
ACMT
(DCC)
LSW ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
User
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
User
Sharpshooter ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
User
LMG ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
User
25m
User
ETR/GR/
CGR
Annual CBRN
IBSR
IBS
IBS
10
4
TLFTT
11
Automatic Fire
Auto Fire
Auto Fire
12
Moving Targets
DCCT/
MMTTR
Moving
Target
Moving
Target
13
LNV
ETR/GR/
CGR
LNV
LNV
14
25m/
ETR/GR/
CGR
15
25m/
ETR/GR/
CGR
16
LFTTA
Adv
LFTTA
S/Veh
LFTTA
M/Veh
19
DCCT
MTLR
20
DCCT
LRS
17
18
1-26
4
TLFTT
(Spec to Role)
NVD
Remarks
LA
25m
CQM
CQM
22
Accelerated Fire
25m
CQM
CQM
23
Failure to Stop
25m
CQM
CQM
24
Multiple Tgts
25m
CQM
CQM
25
The Transition
25m
CQM
CQM
26
25m
CQM
CQM
27
25m
CQM
CQM
28
Moving Target
DCCT
CQM
CQM
SectDef (Day)
LFTTA
SectDef
(Day)
SectDef (Night)
LFTTA
SectDef
(Night)
31
PlDef (Day)
LFTTA
Pl
Def (Day)
32
PlDef (Night)
LFTTA
Pl
Def (Night)
IBSR/
LFTTA
IBS/Ind CQB
LFTTA
Ind F&M
(Day)
35
LFTTA
FTA
(Day)
36
LFTTA
Sect Attack
(Day)
37
Pl Attack (Day)
LFTTA
Sect Attack
(Day)
38
LFTTA
Coy Attack
(Day)
39
BG Attack (Day)
LFTTA
BG Attack
(Day)
FTA (Night)
LFTTA
FTA
(Night)
LFTTA
Sect Attack
(Night)
42
Pl Attack (Night)
LFTTA
Pl Attack
(Night)
43
LFTTA
Coy Attack
(Night)
44
BG Attack (Night)
LFTTA
BG Attack
(Night)
21
29
30
33
34
40
41
CQM
5
LFTT
Defence
Exercises
5
LFTT
Offensive
Exercises
(Day)
5
LFTT
Offensive
Exercises
(NIGHT)
1-27
Objective
Discretionary
Mandatory
= The mandated minimum standard to meet generic operational training requirements, fully re sourced.
Objective
= The objective standard to meet generic operational training requirements, conducted as resources allow.
Discretionary = Conducted to support a specific training requirement, as resources allow.
Ser
Stage
1 and 2
Zeroing/
Application
of Fire
Practice
WHT
Range
RCO
Qual
RN
BCC
RM
DCC
Nil
SAA
Instr
WHT
ACMT Preparation
ETR/GR/
CGR
ACMT Prep
Rifle ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
LSW ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
Sharpshooter ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
LMG ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
25m
User
ETR/GR/
CGR
Annual CBRN
IBSR
10
4
TLFTT
ACMT (BCC)
ACMT
(DCC)
IBS
11
Automatic Fire
Auto Fire
Auto Fire
12
Moving Targets
DCCT/
MMTTR
Moving
Target
Moving
Target
13
LNV
ETR/GR/
CGR
LNV
LNV
14
25m/
ETR/GR/
CGR
15
25m/
ETR/GR/
CGR
16
LFTTA
Adv
LFTTA
S/Veh
LFTTA
M/Veh
19
DCCT
MTLR
20
DCCT
LRS
17
18
1-28
4
TLFTT
(Spec to Role)
Remarks
NVD
LA
25m
CQM
CQM
22
Accelerated Fire
25m
CQM
CQM
23
Failure to Stop
25m
CQM
CQM
24
Multiple Tgts
25m
CQM
CQM
25
The Transition
25m
CQM
CQM
26
25m
CQM
CQM
27
25m
CQM
CQM
28
Moving Target
DCCT
CQM
CQM
SectDef (Day)
LFTTA
SectDef
(Day)
SectDef (Night)
LFTTA
SectDef
(Night)
31
PlDef (Day)
LFTTA
Pl Def
(Day)
32
PlDef (Night)
LFTTA
Pl Def
(Night)
IBSR/
LFTTA
IBS/Ind CQB
LFTTA
Ind F&M
(Day)
35
LFTTA
FTA
(Day)
36
LFTTA
Sect Attack
(Day)
37
Pl Attack (Day)
LFTTA
Pl Attack
(Day)
38
LFTTA
Coy Attack
(Day)
39
BG Attack (Day)
LFTTA
BG Attack
(Day)
FTA (Night)
LFTTA
FTA
(Night)
LFTTA
Sect Attack
(Night)
42
Pl Attack (Night)
LFTTA
Pl Attack
(Night)
43
LFTTA
Coy Attack
(Night)
21
29
30
33
34
40
41
CQM
5
LFTT
Defence
Exercises
5
LFTT
Offensive
Exercises
(Day)
5
LFTT
Offensive
Exercises
(NIGHT)
1-29
1-30
1-31
1-32
CHAPTER 2
MANAGEMENT OF SHOOTING TRAINING (PERSONAL
WEAPONS)
Personal Weapon Concept
0201. Personal Weapon. All service
personnel, on joining a unit, are issued
with a personal weapon. The individuals
appointment and the unit establishment will
determine whether their personal weapon
is to be a Rifle, LSW, LMG or Pistol. The
individual is to retain that weapon as their
personal weapon when practicable except:
a. On posting and attendance
on courses.
CONTENTS
PERSONAL WEAPON CONCEPT
2-1
SAFETY 2-2
QUALIFICATION AND AUTHORISATION
2-2
NIGHT SHOOTING
2-2
CBRN CONDITIONS
2-3
2-3
PHYSICAL FITNESS
2-3
2-4
SHOOTING RECORDS
2-4
2-5
b.
c.
2-1
Safety
0205. It is mandatory for all firers to have passed WHTs prior to live firing of a
weapon, in order to ensure a minimum standard of safety. Conducting officers must
confirm that all personnel firing any weapon have passed the relevant WHTs within
the previous six months of firing
Qualification and Authorisation
0206. SAA Instructor Qualification. It is mandatory that in all units the basic
weapon handling lessons, laid down in the relevant weapon General Staff Publications
(GSP), are given by a qualified Skill At Arms (SAA) Instructor; who themselves are
proven competent to handle the weapons being taught by passing the relevant WHTs
within the last six months.
0207. Course Qualification. The qualification needed by an Officer, WO or NCO
to plan, conduct and supervise live firing, is to have attended and qualified on an
appropriate course listed in Reference A.
0208. Pamphlet No 21. Reference A also lays down the powers of COs and the
rules to be followed if they wish to authorise non-qualified personnel to be employed
as Safety Supervisors
Night Shooting
0209. Importance. Night shooting is a key element of meeting the OSR and cannot
be over emphasised. Night shooting, at the Limit of Night Visibility (LNV), with CWS
and with HMNVS and LA live firing (LF) lessons and assessments are included as
operational shooting skills covered in Stage 4 TLFTT. Night shooting exercises are
included in the suggested shooting progression in LFTT.
0210. Limit of Night Visibility (LNV). The night shooting requirement for all
Services is to fire at the LNV using the optic sight or by instinctive pointing of the iron
sight.
0211. Firing with NVD and TI. To gain maximum benefit from NVD and TI sights
they are to be issued as a personal equipment item to selected users.
0212. Firing with HMNVS and LA. Where issued all members of the section will
be equipped with HMNVS and LA, providing the capability for snap shooting from the
patrol position and accurate fire from other combat fire positions out to 200 metres.
2-2
0213. Night Firing with Illumination. It is anticipated that the majority of night
firing with illumination will take place during LFTT. However, if either ground or airborne illuminances are available, units are encouraged to include night shooting with
illumination practices during their standard range firing periods. There is sufficient
scope within the LF lessons in LFMT, for units to select appropriate night shooting
with illumination practices to match the standard of their soldiers training. In doing
so, however, the appropriate parts of Reference A and range orders should be read to
determine the safety constraints for ranges.
CBRN Conditions
0214. To prepare personnel for the CBRN threat, it is necessary that Skill at Arms
training, both weapon handling and marksmanship, be carried out wearing protective
clothing. An annual CBRN Instructional Shoot and Assessment for all personal
weapons has been included at the end of each weapon chapter. Where possible
CBRN LF should be conducted in full IPE. The minimum level of CBRN protection
that should be worn is respirator and CBRN gloves. Units are also to carry out LFTT
wearing CBRN protection. Units who have a specialist CBRN role may wish to conduct
all LF lessons in CBRN conditions.
Aids to Training and Firing
0215. Small Arms Collimator (SAC). To avoid wasting time and ammunition the
SAC is to be used to bore sight weapons before zeroing. When weapons have been
zeroed, the SAC is to be used to record the Personal Zero Position (PZP) readings.
Thereafter, SAC is to be used before any LF lesson to ensure that readings have not
changed. To save range time it is recommended that bore sighting is conducted on
the day prior to the lesson.
0216. Tracer. Tracer ammunition may be used to assist in the observation of strike
when firing Advanced Application of Fire shoots. There are strict limitations on the use
of tracer on some types of range and under certain climatic conditions. Range orders
will specify any limitations that are in force.
0217. Sandbags. The use of the sandbag for support while shooting is not permitted
during any lessons or tests in LFMT or TLFTT.
Physical Fitness
0218. Requirement. Unless personnel are fully fit they are unlikely to be able to
shoot to the best of their ability under operational conditions. Physical fitness and
coordination are essential for accurate shooting and are to be fully integrated into the
training sequence. Service personnel must be fit enough to:
a. Handle their personal weapon without unnecessary strain in all firing
positions.
b.
0219. Physical Fitness in Training the Battle Shot. Although general physical
fitness is necessary, particular emphasis is to be given to strengthening the muscles
in the upper body that are required for shooting, particularly in the unsupported firing
positions. In LFMT personnel are not expected to fire under physically strenuous
conditions but rather concentrate on improving their basic marksmanship skills.
Short dashes are incorporated into the practices to simulate the rapid move to a
firing position before firing. Endurance fitness becomes a factor in TLFTT where the
Fire and Movement Test for personnel employed in the Basic Close Combat Role
is proceeded by a 300 metre march and the Fire Team Attack where the shoot is
preceded by a 1.2 km march.
Combat Shooting Coaching
0220. Importance. The importance of combat shooting coaching cannot be overemphasised. Comparisons can be made to any other skill or sport expert tuition
and practice are essential. During All Arms Phase 1 Training or during Infantry Phase
2 Training, instructors will invariably be qualified and trained on coaching techniques
and procedures. If standards are to be maintained and improved on, and backward
shots developed, combat shooting coaching is equally important in units.
0221. Role of the Unit Training Officer (UTO). The UTO is responsible to the CO
for the planning of unit shooting activity to meet operational requirements and the
coordination of unit shooting performance. A major task of the UTO, therefore, is to
train sub-unit combat shooting coaches and monitor their performance. After learning
the techniques and procedures, a combat shooting coach can only become effective
by practising, and COs must encourage this. Additional support,guidance and training
is available from Bde Training Teams and the Divisional Operational Shooting Training
Teams (OSTTs).
0222. Qualities of the Combat Shooting Coach. Combat shooting coaches need
the following key qualities:
a.
b.
0227. Army Rifle Association (ARA). The ARA is part of CD Combat, under the
authority of AD DCC and is located at the National Shooting Centre at Bisley, Surrey.
The ARA is responsible for all Target Shooting matters.
Purpose Built Ranges and Their Use
0228. The following purpose built ranges are available for Training the Battle Shot:
Serial
2-6
Type of Range
Type of Training
Tube/Pipe Range
1. Confirmation of zeroing.
2. Predominantly in operational bases.
25 Metre Range
Gallery Range/Converted
Gallery Range (CGR)
10
2-7
2-8
CHAPTER 3
THE RIFLE
Scope
0301. Chapter 3 sets out all Rifle live
firing (LF) lessons to be completed in
LFMT Stages 1, 2 and 3 of Training the
Battle Shot. It includes the application of
LF lessons to all Arms and Services and
the progression and frequency with which
they are to be fired.
0302. This progression and frequency of
firing is essential for preparing firers for the
Rifle Annual Combat Marksmanship Test
(ACMT) in LFMT Stage 3. It is also essential
in preparing the firer for mandatory TLFTT
and LFTT. The detail of TLFTT and LFTT
are in Chapters 10 and 11 respectively.
CONTENTS
SCOPE 3-1
TRAINING AND FIRING SEQUENCE
3-1
SAFETY 3-2
CONDUCT OF LF LESSONS
3-2
3-4
DEFINITION OF STANDARDS
3-5
WHT 3-6
LF LESSONS
3-13
3-65
RIFLE ACMT
3-69
3-75
3-81
0303. The L22A1 Carbine is categorised as a Rifle. The OMS requirement for the
Carbine is the same as for the Rifle ACMT (Basic Close Combat Role).
0304. The OMS requirement for the Rifle when fitted with UGL is Rifle ACMT
(Dismounted Close Combat Role).
Training and Firing Sequence
0305. Phase 1 Initial Training. The LF lessons contained within the Commanders
Guide are to be fired by all recruits during Services Phase 1 Training. Reserve recruits
are to achieve the same standards as regular recruits:
0306. DCC Role Regular and Reserve Units. The ACMTPreparation is to be
fired in accordance with MATTs by all DCC Role Firers in Regular and Reserve units
whose personal weapon is the Rifle.
0307. BCC Role Regular and Reserve Units. The ACMT Preparation is to be
fired in accordance with MATTs by all BCC Role Firers in Regular and Reserve units
whose personal weapon is the Rifle or Carbine.
0308. ACMT Familiarisation with DCCT. After the ACMT Preparation and before
the ACMT is fired on the range, use of DCCT to familiarise firers with the ACMT
practices will improve first time pass rates and the overall standard of shooting.
3-1
0309. Remedial Training. DCCT provides an invaluable aid to the remedial training
of the poor shot. COs are encouraged to make full use of the facilities wherever they
are available. However, final confirmation must be by the use of live firing. All Rifle LF
lessons can be fired on DCCT and may be used as a remedial aid or as a rehearsal
prior to firing on the range.
Safety
0310. It is mandatory for all firers to have completed WHTs prior to live firing of a
weapon, in order to ensure a minimum standard of safety. Conducting officers must
confirm that all firers firing any weapon have completed the relevant WHTs within the
previous six months of firing.
Conduct of LF Lessons
0311. General Requirements. The general requirements of equipment and outline range procedures which apply to all ranges are shown below. Any requirements
specific to a particular LF lesson are contained at the start of each lesson.
0312. Stores. The following stores are required:
Rifles complete to CES
Cleaning material
Issued, serviceable hearing protection
Combat helmets
Issued Body Armour
Personal Shooting Record Book
Coaching Aide Memoire (AC 71158)
Binoculars
First aid kit
SAC Complete
Stop watch
1 per firer
As required
1 per firer
1 per firer
1 per firer
1 per firer
1 per coach
1 per coach
As required
As required
0313. Dress. The dress for Rifle LF lessons should include belt order webbing,
combat helmets and body armour. Additionally, when OSPREY, Mark 7 helmets,
ballistic eye protection and rifle ancillaries are issued, the firer should be given the
opportunity to practice with them. The dress rules for Phase One Recruits and Trainee
Combat Infantrymen should be applied sensibly with a gradual increase in the amount
of additional equipment. However, the conditions for the ACMT are to be rigorously
applied.
0314. DCCT. Firers are to fire the bore sighting practice before firing any other
shoots using DCCT. Firers can be given a preview of all the practices on DCCT in
order to familiarise themselves with the conditions.
0315. SAC. The SAC is to be used to bore sight the rifle prior to firing a grouping
practice. Once zeroed, the Personal Zeroing Position (PZP) is to be noted in the firers
shooting record card and the reading is to be checked prior to any future live firing
lesson. The SAC cannot be used for lessons fired on DCCT.
3-2
0317. Aiming Marks. The POA is to be the bottom centre of the white patch.
0318. Coaching. DCC Training Volume IV, Marksmanship Coaching and the
Coaching Aide Memoire contain details of the coaching requirements. Some essential
points to ensure are:
a. The RCO and all coaches on the range must have prior knowledge of
coaching techniques.
b. Where possible a coach should be with each firer. If there are insufficient
coaches the Master Coach system should be used.
c. For ranges up to and including 300 metres, sights are to be set at 300.
Firers are to be reminded to alter their sights (SUSAT) prior to firing shoots
at 400 metres.
d. All group sizes, MPIs, POAs for other positions, and scores are to be
recorded on the firers personal shooting record card.
e. Coaches are to be in possession of binoculars during all elementary
and advanced application of fire practices.
0319. CQM Coaching. DCC Training Volume IV, Marksmanship Coaching and the
Coaching Aide Memoire contain details of the coaching requirements. Some essential
points to ensure are:
a. The Conducting Officer and all the coaches on the range must have
prior knowledge of CQM coaching and firing techniques.
b. Where possible, a coach should be with each firer. If there are insufficient
coaches all POAs should be recorded on the firers personal shooting record
card.
c. Coaches are to be in possession of binoculars during practices to avoid
the need for dressing forward when possible.
3-3
d. Shot cadence or tempo can be judged in the following manner, for half
second cadence say and between shots (1 and 2 and 3) and for quarter
second cadence, the sights should just have time to bounce onto the target
prior to pulling the trigger again (1, 2, 3, 4).
e. CQM LFMT 5 Pistol can be carried out as a single action, double action
or press drill practice to cover all the nuances of the weapon.
f.
From CQM LFMT 6 onwards the firer should be encouraged to wear
their primary weapon and carry out a dry transition. This will not only practice
the firer in a realistic situation but reinforce the fact that the pistol is a
secondary weapon system and only used in an emergency.
g. The accuracy of the rifle and pistol differs and the scoring areas on the
target reflect this(see Fig 3-1a).Spotters. When grouping at 25 metres, to
enable firers and coaches to gain the maximum information from the shots
fired, members of the waiting detail should be employed as spotters, using
binoculars, to plot the arrival of each shot. To achieve maximum value from
this type of live firing, it is essential that firers are given every opportunity to
discuss the results of their shooting with their coach.
0320. Spotters. Where possible, to enable the firers and coaches to gain the
maximum benefit from the shots being fired, members of the waiting detail should
be employed as spotters, using binoculars to plot the arrival of each shot. To achieve
maximum training value from this type of firing, it is essential that firers are given every
opportunity to discuss the results of their shooting with their coach.
0321. Guide to Progress. Firers who do not attain the suggested measure of
progress should be given further coaching or firing practice before progressing.
0322. Scoring. Scores are to be recorded and announced to the firers at the end
of each practice. Details of the scoring system are shown in each individual lesson.
0323. End of Lesson Procedure. At the end of each LF lesson the following drills
are to be completed once the range is cleared:
a.
b.
c.
Pack kit.
3-5
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
3-6
Test No. 1
Safety
Rifle, unloaded. Safety Catch at F, change lever at R. Weapon lying on
the ground.
1. Order the firer to Take control of the weapon. The firer, without
further direction, is to pick up the weapon and carry out normal safety
precautions.
1. Standard:
Pass:
Fail:
Test No. 2
Stripping, Cleaning and Assembling
Rifle with sling fitted, unloaded, cleaning roll (with combination tool out),
flannelette and oil.
1. Order the firer to Strip the rifle as for daily cleaning. Ask the
following questions:
a. What size flannelette is used to clean the barrel?
b. What size flannelette is used to oil the barrel?
c. What are the differences to normal daily cleaning in the following
conditions (choose any 2 conditions)
(1) Heavy rain and damp conditions.
(2) Dry, sandy or dusty conditions.
(3) Cold and extreme cold conditions.
(4) Hot, wet conditions.
2. Order the firer to indicate the parts of the combination tool that are used
to clean the gas plug.
3. Order the firer to Assemble the Rifle and carry out the function test.
4. Ask the following question:
a. If during the function test, or at any time you notice the change lever
over-rotates beyond its stops, what action is to be taken.
1. Standard:
Pass 1 or 2 mistakes.
Fail More than 2 mistakes.
2. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Test No. 3
Magazine Filling
30 Rounds, magazine.
Instructors Note: All ammunition is to be removed from the magazine. Fit
depressor.
1. On the command Go the firer fills their magazine with 30 Rounds by
hand.
No time limit
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Test No. 4
Loading Standing Position
Rifle, one magazine in fastened pouch.
Instructors Note: Load with a magazine fitted with a depressor.
Give the command Load. Pouches must be refastened.
Instructors Note: Leave rifle loaded for Test No 5.
1. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions
should be carried out quickly and correctly.
2. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Fail More than 1 mistake.
3. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Test No. 5
Ready Drill Prone Position
Rifle loaded (from Test No. 4), representative targets
1. Order Prone Position Down.
2. Once the firer has aligned himself, on to the target order Ready or
issue a range.
1. The actions tested are those relating to the Ready Drill only.
2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions
should be carried out quickly and correctly.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Fail More than 1 mistake.
4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Test No. 6
Immediate Action (IA) Forward Assist
Rifle loaded (from Test No. 4), representative targets
1. Order Fire.
2. Order Rifle firing alright rifle stops. Firer to carry out the
IA...Cocking handle fully forward. Firer is to tap for- ward on the
cocking handle and continue firing.
3. Order Rifle fires alright Stop.
1. The actions tested are those relating to the (IA) and Forward Assist
Drills only.
2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions
should be carried out quickly and correctly.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Fail More than 1 mistake.
4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
3-7
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
3-8
Test No. 7
IA and Loose Magazine Drill
Rifle loaded, representative targets.
1. Order Fire Rifle firing alright rifle stops. Firer to carry out
the IA...Cocking handle fully forward. Firer is to tap forward on the
cocking handle and continue firing.
2. Order Rifle still fails to fire.
3. On examination of body and chamber order Rounds in magazine
chamber clear. Allow the firer to complete the drill.
4. Order Rifle fires alright Stop..
1. The actions tested are those relating to the Loose Magazine Drill only.
2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions
should be carried out quickly and correctly.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Fail More than 1 mistake.
4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Test No. 8
IA and Obstruction Drill
Rifle loaded, representative targets
1. Order Fire Rifle firing alright rifle stops. Firer to carry out the
IA...Cocking Handle not fully forward.
2. On examination of body and chamber, order Obstruction.
3. When the firer has removed the magazine and attempted to clear
the obstruction by hand or using a tool from the maintenance kit, order
Obstruction Clear.
4. When the firer has visually inspected the chamber, order Chamber
Clear.
5. Firer is to complete the obstruction drill.
6. Order Rifle fires alright Stop.
1. The actions tested are those relating to the Obstruction Drill only.
2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions
should be carried out quickly and correctly.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Fail More than 1 mistake.
4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Test No. 9
IA and Empty Magazine Drill
Rifle loaded, representative targets.
1. Instruct the firer to cock the weapon and apply the Holding Open Catch,
with the working parts held to the rear, order Test and adjust fire Rifle
firing alright rifle stops.
2. Firer is to carry out the IA...Empty Magazine. Firer is to carry out the
drill for an empty magazine.
3. When the firer has completed the drill and continued firing, order Rifle
fires alright Stop.
1. The actions tested are those relating to the Empty Magazine Drill only.
2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions
should be carried out quickly and correctly.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Fail More than 1 mistake.
4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Test No. 10
Unloading
Rifle loaded and ready (from Test No. 9)
The test follows on from Test No.9. Give the command Unload. The test
is not complete until the firer has recovered the ejected round, replaced it
in the magazine and fastened the pouch.
1. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions
should be carried out quickly and correctly.
2. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Fail More than 1 mistake.
3. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
3-9
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
3-10
Test No. 11
Group size and Correct Zeroing Position (CZP)
Coaching Aide Memoire for soldier.
Ask the soldier the following questions based on the sight fitted to the rifle
and the distance fired:
Q - What is the maximum permissible extreme spread prior to zeroing the
rifle?
A - 25m optic - 38 mm
25m iron - 50 mm
Q What is the CZP for your rifle?
A 100 m optic 90 mm above the POA 25 m optic - 22 mm below the
POA
A 100 m iron 100 mm above the POA 25 m iron 25 mm below the
POA
Standard:
Pass: Correct answers.
Fail: Incorrect answer.
Test No. 12
Alterations
Coaching Aide Memoire for soldier.
Ask the soldier one of the following three questions with answers
dependant on the sight fitted to the rifle and the distance fired:
Q 1 - If the MPI is 250 mm high and 100 mm left what alterations would be
made?
Q 2 - If the MPI is 200 mm low and 350 mm right what alterations would be
made?
Q 3 - If the MPI is 100 mm low and 50 mm left what alterations would be
made?
Standard:
Pass: Correct answer.
Fail: Incorrect answer.
Note: The soldier is to accurately estimate the adjustments required.
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Test No. 13
Sight Adjustment
Rifle with sighting system Comb tool
Using the answers gained from Test No 2, the soldier is to demonstrate
how the adjustments are to be made to the sight.
Standard:
Pass: All corrections need to be correctly applied.
Note: The solider is to indicate the adjustments using the sight and
combination tool to aid his explanation. No adjustments are to be made to
the sight.
Test No. 14
Permissible Variation
Nil
Ask the soldier the following questions based on the sight fitted to the rifle
and the distance fired:
Q 1 On completion of the 5 round check group, how do you know that the
rifle is zeroed?
A - PV at 100 m:
SUSAT & iron sight is 50 mm.
LDS is 30 mm
A - PV at 25 m:
SUSAT & iron sight is 13 mm
LDS is 10 mm
Q 2 If the PV is greater than the distance allowed what procedure is to be
followed?
A - Leave the 5 round check group on the target and fire another 15
Rounds in order to repeat the zeroing procedure.
Standard:
Pass: Each question correctly answered.
Fail: Incorrect answer.
Test No. 15
Wind Allowance
Representative Fig 11 target.
Representative aiming aid.
3-11
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
3-12
Ask the firer 2 of the questions below, including one from questions 3 and
4:
Q 1 Where would you aim at 100 m with a strong wing L R?
Q 2 Where would you aim at 200 m with a fresh wind R L?
Q 3 Where would you aim at 300 m with a fresh wind L R?
Q 4 Where would you aim at 300 m with a strong wind R L?
Standard:
Pass: 2 correct answers.
Fail: Incorrect answer.
Test No. 16
Miss Drill
As for Test 15.
Ask the firer the following question:
Q After firing 2 Rounds you identify that you are missing the target. What
action would you take, and why?
A Aim at the base centre of the target in order to observe strike and then
aim off accordingly.
Standard:
Pass: Correct answer.
Fail: Incorrect answer.
Test No. 17
Application of Fire
As for Test 15.
Ask the firer 2 questions from the list below:
Q 1 You identify that after firing your group the MPI is forming in the area
of the helmet. Where would you aim so that the MPI lands centrally on the
target?
Q 2 You identify that after firing your group the MPI is forming in the area
of the left edge of the target. Where would you aim so that the MPI lands
centrally on the target?
Q 3 You identify that after firing your group the MPI is forming in the area
his right shoulder. Where would you aim so that the MPI lands centrally on
the target?
Q 4 You identify that after firing your group the MPI that one round is on
the left edge of the target and the other round is on the right edge of the
target. What action would you take, and why?
Standard:
Pass: 2 correct answers.
Fail: Incorrect answer.
25 m Prone (Unsupported)
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
3-13
Practice 2. Grouping
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
61-85mm
b.
46-65mm
3-14
b.
c.
d.
Tells the coach what the aim picture was like at the moment of firing.
3-15
Practice Details
0352. Practice details are as follows:
Practice 1. Grouping
Range/Positioning
25 m Prone (Unsupported)
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 2. Grouping
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
61-85mm
b.
46-65mm
3-16
Ammunition
50 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
3-17
BCC
DCC
Sitting
61-75mm
56-65mm
Kneeling Supported
or Squatting
61-75mm
56-65mm
Standing Supported
61-75mm
56-65mm
Kneeling Unsupported
or Squatting
106-150mm
86-120mm
Standing Unsupported
106-150mm
86-120mm
3-18
3-19
Ammunition
50 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
BCC
DCC
Sitting
61-75mm
56-65mm
Kneeling Supported
or Squatting
61-75mm
56-65mm
Standing Supported
61-75mm
56-65mm
Kneeling Unsupported
or Squatting
106-150mm
86-120mm
Standing Unsupported
106-150mm
86-120mm
3-20
Preliminaries
25m Prone
Ammunition
9 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
3-21
25 m Prone
Ammunition
3 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
b.
50mm
3-22
BCC
DCC
Prone
50mm
38mm
Sitting
65mm
55mm
65mm
55mm
Standing Supported
65mm
55mm
130mm
110mm
Standing Unsupported
130mm
110mm
3-23
Ammunition
24 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
3-25
Practice Details
03110. Practice details are as follows:
Practice 1. Accelerated Fire.
Range/Positioning
15m Standing
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 11/21.
2. 5 x 3 second exposure.
1. Fire 2 shots per exposure with 1 second shot cadence at the left
target.
2. Dress forward and discuss the results.
3. Repeat the practice on the right target.
4. Dress forward and discuss the results, record the scores on the
right target only.
10m Standing
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 11/21.
2. 5 x 3 second exposure.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.
5m Standing
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 11/21.
2. 5 x 2 second exposure.
Instructions
3m Standing
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 11/21.
2. 5 x 2 second exposure.
Instructions
3-26
Scoring
03111. Two points per hit within the inner scoring area. One point within the outer
scoring area. No points anywhere else on the target.
Firers Goals and Progress
HPS 80
Pass 56
End of Lesson Procedure
3-27
3-28
Preliminaries
15m Standing
Ammunition
16 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 11/21.
2. 4 x 4 second exposure.
1. Firer in the CQB stance.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire two shots at the body and two to the head within each
engagement.
4. Discuss the fall of shot, record scores.
3-29
10m Standing
Ammunition
16 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 11/21.
2. 4 x 4 second exposure.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.
5m Standing
Ammunition
16 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 11/21.
2. 4 x 3 second exposure.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.
3m Standing
Ammunition
16 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 11/21.
2. 4 x 3 second exposure.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.
Scoring
03120. Two points per hit within the inner scoring area. One point within the outer
scoring area. No points anywhere else on the target.
Firers Goals and Progress
HPS 128
Pass 90
End of Lesson Procedure
3-30
3-31
03127. Firing Practice. Explain that when confronted with multiple targets at close
range, a firer must quickly decide the priority of engagement before engaging rapidly
and accurately.
Practice Details
03128. Practice details are as follows:
Practice 1. Pairs
Range/Positioning
15m Standing
Ammunition
16 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 2x Fig 11/21.
2. 4 x 4 second exposure.
1. On command or appearance of the targets, fire two Rounds at each
target.
2. After the second engagement, dress forward and discuss the
results.
3. Record the scores
4. Repeat the practice firing from the left side of the body.
5. Record the scores.
Practice 2. Pairs
Range/Positioning
10m Standing
Ammunition
16 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. 2x Fig 11/21.
2. 4 x 4 second exposure.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.
Practice 3. Pairs
Range/Positioning
5m Standing
Ammunition
16 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. 2x Fig 11/21.
2. 4 x 3 second exposure.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.
3-32
Practice 4. Pairs
Range/Positioning
3m Standing
Ammunition
16 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. 2x Fig 11/21.
2. 4 x 3 second exposure.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.
Scoring
03129. Two points per hit within the inner scoring area. One point within the outer
scoring area. No points anywhere else on the target.
Firers Goals and Progress
HPS 128
Pass
90
3-33
100 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 12 on a screen
Instructions
3-34
Practice 2. Deliberate
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 1.
Instructions
Practice 3. Deliberate
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 1.
Instructions
As per Practice 2.
Practice 4. Deliberate
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 1
Instructions
As per Practice 2.
Practice 5. Deliberate
Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a screen
Instructions
As per Practice 2.
Practice 6. Deliberate
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 5.
Instructions
As per Practice 2.
3-35
Practice 7. Deliberate
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 5.
Instructions
As per Practice 2.
Practice 8. Deliberate
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 5.
Instructions
As per Practice 2.
Practice 9. Deliberate
Range/Positioning
200 m Sitting
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 5.
Instructions
As per Practice 2.
300 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 5
Instructions
As per Practice 2.
Scoring
03137. The firer/coach will identify the MPI and establish the new POA. Fire a further
5 Rounds.
Firers Goals and Progress
03138. Achieving group sizes in relation to the ESA and applying fire successfully.
End of Lesson Procedure
3-36
Rifle LF 11. Establish the Point of Aim and Apply Fire at 100m
(All Positions)
A. RCO Notes
03139. Aim. To confirm that the firer can hold, aim and fire their rifle in the prone,
sitting, kneeling or squatting and standing position at 100m and apply fire to the centre
of the target.
03140. Conduct. This lesson may be conducted on either a CGR (with or without
SARTS), an ETR if converted to SARTS, or a GR.
03141. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all
practices.
03142. Stores.
Normal range stores
1 x 1.220 m screen with Figure 11 per firer
1 x 1.220 m screen with Figure 12 per firer or
1 x Figure 12d per firer (on SARTS converted range)
45 x Rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Check Zero
3-37
Practice 2. Deliberate
Range/Positioning
100m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3. Deliberate
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 2.
Instructions
As per Practice 2.
Practice 4. Deliberate
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 2.
Instructions
As per Practice 2.
Practice 5. Deliberate
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 2.
Instructions
As per Practice 2.
Scoring
03146. After the 5 shots the target is lowered and all shot holes are indicated with
spotting discs.
03147. The firer/coach will identify the MPI and establish the new POA. Fire a further
5 Rounds. After the 5th shot the target is lowered and all shots are indicated with
spotting discs.
Firers Goals and Progress
03148. Achieving group sizes in relation to the ESA and applying fire successfully.
End of Lesson Procedure
3-38
200 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
3-39
Practice 2. Deliberate
Range/Positioning 200 m Kneeling Supported/ Squatting
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 1.
Instructions
As per Practice 1.
Practice 3. Deliberate
Range/Positioning 200 m Standing Supported
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 1.
Instructions
As per Practice 1.
Practice 4. Deliberate
Range/Positioning 200 m Sitting
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 1.
Instructions
As per Practice 1.
Practice 5. Deliberate
Range/Positioning 200 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 1.
Instructions
As per Practice 1.
Practice 6. Deliberate (DCC Only)
Range/Positioning 300 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 1.
Instructions
As per Practice 1.
Scoring
03156. After the 5 shots the target is lowered and all shot holes are indicated with
spotting discs.
03157. The firer/coach will identify the MPI and establish the new POA. Fire a further
5 Rounds. After the 5th shot the target is lowered and all shots are indicated with
spotting discs.
Firers Goals and Progress
03158. Achieving group sizes in relation to the ESA and applying fire successfully.
End of Lesson Procedure
3-40
Instructions
100 m Prone
8 Rounds
1. Figure 12.
2. 3 x Sighters
3. 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals.
1. Firers in the prone position.
2. Fire 3 x sighters one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit.
3. Identify the corrected POA.
4. Fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit.
4. Order Watch and Shoot
3-41
Practice 2. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
100 m Sitting
8 Rounds
1. Figure 12.
2. 3 x Sighters
3. 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals.
1. Firers in the sitting position.
2. Fire 3 x sighters one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit.
3. Fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit.
4. Order Watch and Shoot
Practice 3. Snap/Rapid
Range/Positioning 100 m Standing and Kneeling Unsupported Squatted/prone
Ammunition
16 Rounds
1. Figure 12.
2. 3 x Sighters
Target/ Exposure
3. 2 x 12 second exposures with an interval to allow all firers to adopt
the standing alert position.
1. Fire 3 x sighters from both positions one round at each exposure,
targets fall when hit.
2. Firer in the standing alert position.
3. On the appearance of the target, the firer is to fire one round
Instructions
standing then adopt either the kneeling unsupported/squatting or prone
position and fire a further 4 Rounds at the exposure.
4. Firers must adopt the standing alert position between exposures.
5. Targets up and hold.
6. Order Watch and Shoot.
Practice 4. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
3-42
200 m Prone
8 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
2. 3 x Sighters
3. 5 x 5 second exposure with irregular intervals.
1. Firers in the prone position.
2. Fire 3 x sighters one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit.
3. Fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit.
4. Order Watch and Shoot.
Practice 5. Rapid
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 6. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 7. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
3-43
Scoring
03166. One point per hit. Sighters are not scored.
Firers Goals and Progress
03167. The OMS for each practice or group of practices shown in the table below is
a guide to progress.
OMS Requirement
Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
BCC
DCC
Mksmn
1&2
100 m
10
10
100 m
10
10
4&5
200 m
10
10
6&7
200 m
10
10
300 m
10
10
3-44
HPS
Instructions
100 m Prone
8 Rounds
1. Figure 12.
2. 3 x Sighters.
3. 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals.
1. Firers in the prone position.
2. Fire 3 x sighters one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit.
3. Fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit.
4. Order Watch and Shoot
3-45
Practice 2. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
100 m Sitting
8 Rounds
1. Figure 12.
2. 3 x Sighters
3. 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals.
1. Firers in the sitting position.
2. Fire 3 x sighters one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit.
3. Fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit.
4. Order Watch and Shoot
Practice 3. Snap/Rapid
Range/Positioning 100 m Standing and Kneeling Unsupported/ Squatting/Prone
Ammunition
16 Rounds
1. Figure 12.
2. 3 x Sighters.
Target/ Exposure
3. 2 x 12 second exposures with an interval to allow all firers to adopt
the standing alert position.
1. Fire 3 x sighters from both positions one round at each exposure,
targets fall when hit.
2. Firer in the standing alert position.
3. On the appearance of the target, the firer is to fire one round
Instructions
standing then adopt either the kneeling unsupported/squatting or prone
position and fire a further 4 Rounds at the exposure.
4. Firers must adopt the standing alert position between exposures.
5. Targets up and hold.
6. Order Watch and Shoot.
Scoring
03176. One point per hit. Sighters are not scored.
Firers Goals and Progress
03177. The OMS for each practice or group of practices shown in the table below is
a guide to progress.
OMS Requirement
Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
BCC
DCC
Mksmn
1&2
100 m
10
10
100 m
10
10
3-46
HPS
Range/Target
100 m
Figure 12
UP
05
17
26
37
47
Timings
DOWN
10
22
31
42
52
Remarks
100 m
Figure 12
UP
05
17
26
37
47
DOWN
10
22
31
42
52
100 m
Figure 12
UP
05
DOWN
18
3-47
Instructions
3-48
200 m Prone
8 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
2. 3 x Sighters
3. 5 x 5 second exposure with irregular intervals
1. Firers in the prone position.
2. Fire 3 x sighters one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit.
3. Fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit.
4. Order Watch and Shoot.
Practice 2. Rapid
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
3-49
Scoring.
03187. One point per hit. Sighters are not scored.
Firers Goals and Progress
03188. The OMS for each practice or group of practices shown in the table below is
a guide to progress.
OMS Requirement
Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
BCC
DCC
Mksmn
1&2
200 m
10
10
3&4
200 m
10
10
300 m
10
10
3-50
HPS
Range/Target
200 m
Figure 11
UP
05
19
33
45
58
Timings
DOWN
11
25
39
51
1:04
Remarks
200 m
Figure 11
UP
05
DOWN
16
1. Up and Hold
200 m
Figure 11
UP
05
21
35
47
1:00
DOWN
14
26
40
52
1:05
200 m
Figure 11
UP
05
17
26
37
47
DOWN
10
22
31
42
52
300 m
Figure 11
UP
05
21
35
47
1:00
1:15
DOWN
14
26
40
52
1:05
1:26
3-51
Instructions
3-52
Practice 2. Snap/Rapid
Range/Positioning 100 m Standing and Kneeling Unsupported/ Squatting/Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
1. Figure 12.
Target/ Exposure
2. 2 x 12 second exposures with an interval to allow all firers to adopt
the standing alert position.
1. Firer in the standing alert position.
2. On the appearance of the target, the firer is to fire one round
standing then adopt either the kneeling unsupported/squatting or prone
Instructions
position and fire a further 4 Rounds at the exposure.
3. Firers must adopt the standing alert position between exposures.
4. Targets up and hold.
5. Order Watch and Shoot.
Practice 3. Snap/Rapid
Range/Positioning 200 m Prone and Fire Trench
Ammunition
10 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
Target/ Exposure
2. 5 x 5 second exposure with irregular intervals, followed by 1 x 10
second exposure
1. Firer in the prone position.
2. Fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit.
3. Order Watch and Shoot.
Instructions
4. Apply Safety move into the Fire Trench.
5. Fire 5 Rounds at the exposure, targets up and hold.
6. Order Five Rounds rapid, Watch and Shoot.
Practice 4. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
3-53
Scoring.
03197. One point per hit. Sighters are not scored.
Firers Goals and Progress
03198. The OMS for each practice or group of practices shown in the table below are
to be achieved as confirmation of stages
OMS Requirement
Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
BCC
DCC
Mksmn
100 m
10
10
100 m
10
10
200 m
10
10
200 m
10
10
300 m
10
10
3-54
HPS
Instructions
3-55
Scoring
03207. One point per hit.
Firers Goals and Progress
03208. The OMS for each practice or group of practices shown in the table below is
a guide to progress.
OMS Requirement
Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
BCC
DCC
Mksmn
100 m
10
10
100 m
10
10
HPS
Range/Target
100 m
Figure 12
UP
05
17
26
37
47
DOWN
10
22
31
42
52
100 m
Figure 12
UP
05
DOWN
18
3-56
Timings
Remarks
3-57
Practice 1. Snap/Rapid
Range/Positioning 200 m Prone and Fire Trench
Ammunition
10 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
Target/ Exposure
2. 5 x 5 second exposure with irregular intervals, followed by 1 x 10
second exposure
1. Firer in the prone position.
2. Fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit.
3. Order Watch and Shoot.
Instructions
4. Apply Safety move into the Fire Trench.
5. Fire 5 Rounds at the exposure, targets up and hold.
6. Order Five Rounds rapid, Watch and Shoot.
Practice 2. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Scoring
03218. One point per hit.
Firers Goals and Progress
03219. The OMS for each practice or group of practices shown in the table below is
a guide to progress.
OMS Requirement
Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
BCC
DCC
Mksmn
200 m
10
10
200 m
10
10
3-58
HPS
Range/Target
200 m
Figure 11
UP
05
19
33
45
58
UP
16
Timings
DOWN
11
25
39
51
1:04
DOWN
27
Remarks
200 m
Figure 11
UP
05
21
35
47
1:00
DOWN
14
26
40
52
1:05
UP
05
17
26
37
47
DOWN
10
22
31
42
52
3-59
3-60
Practice 1. Snap/Rapid
Range/Positioning 300 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
Target/ Exposure
2. 1 x 8 second exposure followed by 4 x 4 second exposures with
irregular intervals, followed by 1 x 10 second exposure.
1. Firer in the standing alert position, 5 m behind the firing point,
ready.
2. On appearance of the target move onto the firing point, adopt the
prone position and fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when
Instructions
hit.
3. Order Watch out.
4. After the fifth exposure, target is up and hold, order Stop, five
Rounds rapid, Watch and Shoot.
Scoring
03229. One point per hit.
Firers Goals and Progress
03230. The OMS for each practice or group of practices shown in the table below is
a guide to progress.
OMS Requirement
Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
BCC
DCC
Mksmn
300 m
10
HPS
10
Range/Target
300 m
Figure 11
Timings
UP
05
21
35
47
1:00
1:15
DOWN
14
26
40
52
1:05
1:26
Remarks
1. Fall when hit.
2. Final exposure up and
hold.
3-61
Instructions
3-62
Practice 2. Snap/Rapid
Range/Positioning 100 m Standing and Kneeling Unsupported/ Squatting/Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
1. Figure 12.
Target/ Exposure
2. 2 x 12 second exposures with an interval to allow all firers to adopt
the standing alert position.
1. Firer in the standing alert position.
2. On the appearance of the target, the firer is to fire one round
standing then adopt either the kneeling unsupported/squatting or prone
Instructions
position and fire a further 4 Rounds at the exposure.
3. Firers must adopt the standing alert position between exposures.
4. Targets up and hold.
5. Order Watch and Shoot.
Practice 3. Snap/Rapid
Range/Positioning 200 m Prone and Fire Trench
Ammunition
10 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
Target/ Exposure
2. 5 x 5 second exposure with irregular intervals, followed by 1 x 10
second exposure
1. Firer in the prone position.
2. Fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit.
3. Order Watch and Shoot.
Instructions
4. Apply Safety move into the Fire Trench.
5. Fire 5 Rounds at the exposure, targets up and hold.
6. Order Five Rounds rapid, Watch and Shoot.
Practice 4. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
3-63
Practice 5. Snap/Rapid
Range/Positioning 300 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
Target/ Exposure
2. 1 x 8 second exposure followed by 4 x 4 second exposures with
irregular intervals, followed by 1 x 10 second exposure.
1. Firer in the standing alert position, 5 m behind the firing point,
ready.
2. On appearance of the target move onto the firing point, adopt the
prone position and fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when
Instructions
hit.
3. Order Watch out.
4. After the fifth exposure, target is up and hold, order Stop, five
Rounds rapid, Watch and Shoot.
Scoring
03240. One point per hit.
Firers Goals and Progress
03241. The OMS for each practice or group of practices shown in the table below are
to be achieved as confirmation of stages
OMS Requirement
Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
BCC
DCC
Mksmn
100 m
10
10
100 m
10
10
200 m
10
10
200 m
10
10
300 m
10
10
3-64
HPS
03246. Stores.
Normal range stores
1 x Figure 11 on a screen with a 75 mm x 100 mm white patch
(on the centre of the figure) per firer.
1 x Figure 11/21 Stick In at 50m per firer
1 x Figure 12 at 100 metres per firer
1 x Figure 12 on a screen (GR) at 100 metres per firer
1 x Figure 11 at 200 and 300 metres per firer
1 x Figure 11 on a screen (GR) at 200 and 300 metres per firer or
SARTS converted range
1 x Figure 12 at 100 metres per firer
1 x Figure 11 at 200 and 300 metres per firer
91 DCC 85 BCC x Rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer
03247. Miscellaneous.
a. The dress and equipment for the ACMT Preparation is to be the same
as the ACMT.
b. Weapons must be collimated or bore sighted before live firing
commences.
c. Firers must achieve a 300 mm group with 20 Rounds from the prone
position at 100 metres with Iron Sight or 225 mm group with Optic Sight
during Practice 1 before adjusting their sights.
3-65
Instructions
100 m Prone
20 Rounds
Figure 11 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or SARTS
Figure 12d
1. Fire 4 x 5 round groups at the same aiming mark.
2. The firer is to apply his safety catch, stand up, then re-adopt his
position between groups.
3. Discuss the group and measure the group size.
4. Identify the MPI and adjust for zero if necessary.
3-66
Practice Details
03251. Practice details are as follows:
Practice 3. Establish POA 3-15 m
Range/Positioning 3-15 m Standing CQB Position
Ammunition
12 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11/21 Stick in
1. At each range fire two well aimed shots at the nominated aiming mark.
Instructions
2. Estb the POA.
3. Fire a shot to confirm the POA.
Practice 4. Establish POA 100 m
100 m Prone,Sitting, Standing unsupported, Kneeling or Squatting
Range/Positioning
unsupported
Ammunition
24 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Figure 12 or Figure 12 (on a screen) or SARTS Figure 12
1. Fire 3 Rounds application to confirm the MPI.
2. If possible all shots are to be signalled or viewed
Instructions
3. Firers are to record their POA on the shooting record.
4. Fire further Rounds (3 maximum) to confirm the POA.
5. Repeat the practice for each firing position.
Practice 5. Establish POA 200 m
Range/Positioning 200 m Prone, Kneeling Supported Fire Trench, Standing Supported
Ammunition
24 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 or Figure 11 (on a screen) or SARTS Figure 11
1. Fire 3 Rounds application to confirm the MPI.
2. If possible all shots are to be signalled or viewed.
Instructions
3. Firers are to record their POA on the shooting record.
4. Fire further Rounds (3 maximum) to confirm the POA.
5. Repeat the practice for each firing position.
Practice 6. Establish POA 300 m (DCC only)
Range/Positioning 300m Prone
Ammunition
6 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 or Figure 11 (on a screen) or SARTS Figure 11
1. Fire 3 Rounds application to confirm the MPI.
2. If possible all shots are to be signalled or viewed.
3. Firers are to record their POA on the shooting record.
Instructions
4. Fire further Rounds (3 maximum) to confirm
the POA.
5. Repeat the practice for each firing position.
3-67
Additional Practices
Range/Positioning 100 300 m
Ammunition
Remaining Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As Per ACMT
Concentrating on known or likely weaknesses conduct selected ACMT
Instructions
practices
3-68
Rifle/Carbine ACMT
A. RCO Notes
03252. Firing Requirement.
a. ACMT (DCC Role) is to be fired by all Infantry firers during Infantry
Phase 2 Training, annually by all combat infantrymen, RLC Firer Pioneer
Support personnel and personnel employed in the DCC Role whose personal
weapon is the Rifle.
b. ACMT (BCC Role) is to be fired by all firers during Phase 1 Other
Arms Recruit Training and annually by all Other Arms and Service personnel
employed in the Basic Close Combat Role whose personal weapon is the
Rifle/Carbine.
03253. Ranges. Rifle/Carbine ACMT can be fired on an ETR, GR or CGR.
03254. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete.
03255. Stores.
Normal range stores
1 x Figure 11 on a screen with a 1 x 75 x 100 mm white patch
1 x Figure 12 at 100 metres per firer
1 x Figure 11 at 200/300 metres per firer
2 x Figure 11/21 Stick In, with 2 x 25 mm aiming marks per target
SARTS
1 x Figure 12 at 100 metres per firer
1 x Figure 11 at 200/300 metres per firer
2 x Figure 11/21 Stick In, with 2 x 25 mm aiming marks per target
03256. Rules.
a. BCC firers who have not fired LF6 to 9 (CQM) are not to fire practice
1 (only applicable to Phase 1 Other Arms Training).
b. The dress and equipment for the test is to be combat dress, combat
helmet, hearing protection and belt order webbing, body armour (as issued).
c.
d.
e.
03257. Time Charts. A time chart is included after the Practice Details.
03258. Ammo. DCC - 79 Rounds, BCC 69 Rounds, this includes 5 Rounds for check
zeroing and 8 Rounds to confirm CQB POA.
3-69
Practice Details
03262. Practice details are as follows:
Practice 1. CQM
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
3-70
Practice 2. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3. Snap/Rapid
Range/Positioning 100 m Standing and Kneeling Unsupported/ Squatting/Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
1. Figure 12.
Target/ Exposure
2. 2 x 12 second exposures with an interval to allow all firers to adopt
the standing alert position.
1. Firer in the standing alert position.
2. On the appearance of the target, the firer is to fire one round
standing then adopt either the kneeling unsupported/squatting or prone
Instructions
position and fire a further 4 Rounds at the exposure.
3. Firers must adopt the standing alert position between exposures.
4. Targets up and hold.
5. Order Watch and Shoot.
Practice 4. Snap/Rapid
Range/Positioning 200 m Prone and Fire Trench
Ammunition
10 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
Target/ Exposure
2. 5 x 5 second exposure with irregular intervals, followed by 1 x 10
second exposure
1. Firer in the prone position.
2. Fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit.
3. Order Watch and Shoot.
Instructions
4. Apply Safety move into the Fire Trench.
5. Fire 5 Rounds at the exposure, targets up and hold.
6. Order Five Rounds rapid, Watch and Shoot.
3-71
Practice 5. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Scoring
03263. Practice 1 - Two points per hit, inner scoring area. One point per hit, outer
scoring area. No points anywhere else on the target.
03264. Practices 2 to 6 - One point per hit.
Standards
03265. The OMS for each practice is shown in the table below. If a firer fails a practice
they must reshoot that practice only to achieve the OMS. Firers who fail are to have
coaching before re-testing.
3-72
Prac
Range
Rounds
15 - 3m
2
3
OMS Requirement
HPS
BCC
DCC
Mksmn
16
22
22
26
32
100 m
10
10
100 m
10
10
200 m
10
10
200 m
10
10
300 m
10
NA
10
DCC
66
58
68
82
BCC
56
48
60
72
Less Prac 1
40
26
34
40
Totals
3-73
Range/Target
15 3m
Figure 11/21
Stick in
UP
05
DOWN
09
1. Up and hold.
2. Exposures controlled by whistle or
commands.
3. Repeat 3 times.
100 m
Figure 12
UP
05
17
26
37
47
DOWN
10
22
31
42
52
100 m
Figure 12
UP
05
DOWN
18
200 m
Figure 11
200 m
Figure 11
300 m
Figure 11
DOWN
11
25
39
51
1:04
DOWN
16
DOWN
14
26
40
52
1:05
DOWN
10
22
31
42
52
DOWN
14
26
40
52
1:05
1:26
UP
05
19
33
45
58
UP
05
UP
05
21
35
47
1:00
UP
05
17
26
37
47
UP
05
21
35
47
1:00
1:15
3-74
Timings
Remarks
c.
d.
e. The ammunition allocated for the ACMT includes 5 Rounds for check
zeroing.
03273. Time Chart. A time chart is included after the Practice Details.
03274. Ammunition. ACMT(Base Location) 82 Rounds.
3-75
Practice Details
03278. Practice details are as follows:
Practice 1. Deliberate
Range/Positioning 100 m Standing Supported
Ammunition
5 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
Target/ Exposure
2. 5 x 6 second exposures with intervals of 5 seconds.
1. Firers in the standing supported position.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Firers are to fire one round at each exposure, from the standing
Instructions
supported position.
4. Targets are fall when hit. Firers are to adopt the standing alert position
between exposures.
Practice 2. Rapid
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
3-76
Practice 3. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 5. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
3-77
Practice 6. Snap/Rapid
Range/Positioning 100 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
2. 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals, followed by a 15
Target/ Exposure
second intervals and 1 x 15 second exposure.
1. Firers in prone position.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Firers are to fire one round at each exposure.
4. Targets are fall when hit.
Instructions
5. After fifth exposure order Stop, 5 Rounds Rapid, Watch and
Shoot.
6. Firers are to fire 5 Rounds at this exposure.
7. Targets up and hold.
Practice 7. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 8. Rapid
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
3-78
50 m Standing Unsupported
5 Rounds
1. Figure 12 at foot of Mantlet (see note).
2. 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals.
1. Firers in the nominated position.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire one round at each exposure.
Note: Figure 12 stick-in targets are to be positioned in front of the mantlet. Firers
are to move forward of the 100m firing point until 50m in front of the target. Targets
positioned in the Hythe frames or SARTS on top of the Mantlet may only be engaged
where Range Standing Orders permit their use.
Scoring
03279. One point per hit.
Standards
03280. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS at each
firing distance (see relevant table below). Failure to achieve the OMS at any firing
distance will constitute a failure of the LF lesson, however, only the practices at the
firing distances where the OMS was not met need to be fired again. Firers who fail
are to undergo further practice, with coaching for the areas of weakness, before retesting.
Prac
1-7
Range
100 m
Total Rounds
65
OMS Requirement
45
HPS
65
50 m
49
70
Totals
3-79
Practice
Range/Target
100m
Figure 11
100m
Figure 11
Timings
Figure 11
100m
UP DOWN
05
12
17
24
29
36
41
48
56
1:03
1:09 1:16
1:26 1:33
1:38 1:45
1:54 2:01
2:06 2:13
Figure 11
100m
Figure 11
100m
UP DOWN
05
16
31
42
50
1:01
1:11 1:22
1:31 1:42
UP DOWN
05
16
20
27
Figure 11
100m
UP
05
15
23
32
40
Figure 11
100m
UP
05
19
DOWN
14
26
50 m
Figure 12
UP
05
13
25
34
44
DOWN
10
18
30
39
49
3-80
Remarks
UP DOWN
05
12
17
24
29
36
41
48
53 1.00
UP DOWN
05 41
DOWN
10
20
28
37
45
1:00 1:16
3-81
Practice Details
03289. Practice details are as follows:
Practice 1. Deliberate
Range/Positioning 100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 12 on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d
1. Fire 5 Rounds to identify the POA.
Instructions
2. Record the score and note the appropriate POA on the shooting
record card.
Practice 2. Deliberate
Range/Positioning 100 m Kneeling Unsupported
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 12 on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d
Instructions
As per Prac 1
Practice 3. Deliberate
Range/Positioning 200 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a screen or SARTS Figure 11
Instructions
As per Prac 1
Practice 4. Deliberate
Range/Positioning 200 m Kneeling Supported
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a screen or SARTS Figure 11
Instructions
As per Prac 1
Assessment Details
03290. Practice details are as follows:
Practice 5. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
3-82
Practice 6. Rapid
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 7. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 8. Rapid
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
100 m Prone
5 Rounds
1. Figure 12 or SARTS Figure 12d.
2. 1 x 12 second exposure
1. Fire in the nominated position.
2. Order Five Rounds rapid, Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire five Rounds at the exposure.
4. Targets up and hold.
200 m Prone
5 Rounds
1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11.
2. 1 x 12 second exposures.
1. Fire in the nominated position.
2. Order Five Rounds Rapid, Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire five Rounds at the exposure.
4. Targets up and hold.
Scoring
03291. One point per hit.
Standards
03292. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS at each
firing distance in Practices 5 to 8. Failure to achieve the OMS at any firing distance will
constitute a failure of the LF lesson, however, only the practices at the firing distances
where the OMS was not met need to be fired again. Firers who fail are to undergo
further practice, with coaching for the areas of weakness, before re-testing.
3-83
Practice
Range
Total
Rounds
5&6
100m
7&8
200m
OMS Requirement
HPS
DCC
BCC
10
10
10
10
13
11
20
Totals
TIME CHART
03293. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery
ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be
allowed.
3-84
Practice
Range/Target
100 m
Figure 12
UP DOWN
05
12
17
24
29
36
41
48
53 1:00
Timings
100 m
Figure 12
UP DOWN
05 18
Up and hold.
200 m
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05
14
19
28
32
41
45
54
59 1:08
200 m
Figure 11
As for Practice 6.
Remarks
Up and hold.
Practices 1 to 3.
b.
Practices 4 to 10.
03296. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all
practices. These timings do not include movement between ranges.
03297. Rules.
a. The dress and equipment for this test is to be combat dress, belt order
webbing, combat helmet, combat body armour (as issued) and issued,
serviceable hearing protection.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
03298. Time Charts. A time chart is included after the Practice Details.
03299. Ammunition. 60 rounds.
Practice Details
03302. Practice details are as follows:
Practice 1. Rapid
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
25 m Prone
5 Rounds
1. Figure 12 (100m representative target).
2. 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals
1. Firer in the nominated position.
2. Fire one round at each exposure.
3. Order Watch and Shoot.
Practice 2. Snap/Rapid
Range/Positioning 25 m Standing and Kneeling Unsupported/ Squatting/Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
1. Figure 12 (100m representative target).
Target/ Exposure
2. 2 x 12 second exposures with an interval to allow all firers to adopt
the standing alert position.
1. Firer in the standing alert position.
2. On the appearance
of the target, the firer is to fire one round standing then adopt either the
Instructions
kneeling unsupported/ squatting or prone position and fire a further 4
rounds at the exposure.
3. Firers must adopt the standing alert position between exposures.
4. Order Watch and Shoot.
Practice 3. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
3-86
25 m Kneeling Unsupported
5 Rounds
1. Figure 12 (100m representative target).
2. 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals.
1. Firer in the nominated position.
2. Fire one round at each exposure.
3. Order Watch and Shoot.
Practice 4. Snap/Rapid
Range/Positioning 125 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
1. Figure 11 (200m representative target).
Target/ Exposure
2. 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals, followed by 15
seconds later by 1 x 10 second exposure.
1. Firer in the nominated position.
2. Fire one round at each exposure.
3. Targets fall when hit.
4. After the fifth exposure order Stop, 5 rounds rapid, Watch and
Instructions
Shoot..
5. Fire 5 rounds at the exposure.
6. Targets up and hold.
7. Order Watch and Shoot.
Practice 5. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 6. Rapid
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
3-87
Practice 7. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 8. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
125 m Prone
5 Rounds
1. Figure 11 (300m representative target).
2. 1 x 8 second exposure followed 5 seconds later by 4 x 4 second
exposures with intervals of 5 10 seconds between intervals.
1. Firer in the standing alert position.
2. The appearance of the target is the signal to adopt the nominated
position and fire one round at each exposure.
3. Targets fall when hit.
4. Order Watch Out
Practice 9. Rapid/Snap
Range/Positioning 125 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
1. Figure 11 (300m representative target).
Target/ Exposure
2. 1 x 15 second exposure followed 10 seconds later by 5 x 4 second
exposures with intervals of 5 12 seconds between intervals.
1. Firer in the standing alert position, loaded, ready.
2. The appearance of the target is the signal to adopt the nominated
position and fire 5 rounds at each exposure.
3. Targets up and hold.
Instructions
4. After the first exposure order Stop, Watch and Shoot.
5. Fire one round at each of the remaining exposures.
6. Targets fall when hit.
7. Order Five rounds, rapid, Watch Out.
3-88
Scoring
03303. Practice 1 - Two points per hit, inner scoring area. One point per hit, outer
scoring area. No points anywhere else on the target.
Practices 2 to 6 - One point per hit.
Standards
03304. The OMS for each practice is shown in the table below. If a firer fails a practice
they must reshoot that practice only to achieve the OMS. Firers who fail are to have
coaching before re-testing
Prac
Representative
Range
Rounds
1&3
100m
OMS Requirement
HPS
Score
Mksm
10
10
100m
10
10
200m
10
10
5&6
200m
10
10
7&8
300m
10
10
300m
10
10
3-89
3-90
Range/Target
Timings
Remarks
25 m
UP
Figure 12 (100 m
05
representative target.) 17
26
37
47
DOWN
10
22
31
42
52
25 m
UP
Figure 12 (100 m
05
representative target.)
DOWN
18
25 m
Figure 12 (100 m
representative target.)
125 m
UP
Figure 11 (200 m
05
representative target.) 17
26
37
47
1:07
DOWN
10
22
31
42
52
1:18
125 m
UP
Figure 11 (200 m
05
representative target.)
DOWN
14
125 m
UP
Figure 11 (200 m
05
representative target.)
DOWN
16
Up and hold.
125 m
Figure 11 (300 m
representative target.)
As for Practice 1.
125 m
UP
Figure 11 (300 m
05
representative target.) 19
33
45
58
As for Practice 1.
DOWN
14
24
38
50
1:03
2. Up and hold.
125 m
UP
Figure 11 (300 m
05
representative target.) 31
43
60
1:15
1:25
DOWN
21
36
48
1:05
1:20
1:30
1. Up and hold
2. Fall when hit
3-91
3-92
CHAPTER 4
Scope
Contents
SCOPE 4-1
TRAINING AND FIRING SEQUENCE
4-1
SAFETY 4-1
CONDUCT OF LF LESSONS
4-2
WEAPON HANDLING TESTS GENERAL
INSTRUCTIONS 4-4
DEFINITION OF STANDARDS
4-4
WHTs 4-5
LF LESSON 1
4-9
LF LESSON 2
4-11
LF LESSON 3
4-13
LF LESSON 4
4-15
LF LESSON 5
4-19
LSW ACMT PREPARATION
4-25
ACMT 4-29
CBRN INSTRUCTION/ASSESSMENT
4-35
Conduct of LF Lessons
0408. General Requirements. The general requirements of equipment and outline range procedures which apply to all ranges are shown below. Any requirements
specific to a particular LF lesson are contained at the start of each lesson.
0409. Stores. The following stores are required:
LSW complete to CES
Cleaning material
Issued, serviceable hearing protection
Combat Helmets
Body Armour
Personal Shooting Record Book
Coachs Aide Memoire (AF B71158)
Binoculars
First aid kit
SAC
Stop watches
1 per firer
As required
1 per firer
1 per firer
1 per firer
1 per firer
1 per coach
1 per coach
Complete
As required
As required
0410. Dress. The dress for LSW LF lessons should include belt order webbing,
Combat Helmets and body armour. Additionally, when OSPREY, Mark 7 helmets,
ballistic eye protection and LSW ancillaries are issued, the firer should be given the
opportunity to practice with them. The dress rules for Phase One Recruits and Trainee
Combat Infantrymen should be applied sensibly with a gradual increase in the amount
of additional equipment. However, the conditions for the ACMT are to be rigorously
applied.
0411. DCCT. Personnel are to fire the bore sighting practice before firing any other
shoots using DCCT. Firers can be given a preview of all the practices on DCCT in
order to familiarise themselves with the conditions.
0412. SAC. The SAC is to be used to bore sight the rifle prior to firing a grouping
practice. Once zeroed, the Personal Zeroing Position (PZP) is to be noted in the firers
shooting record card and the reading is to be checked prior to any future live firing
lesson. The SAC cannot be used for lessons fired on DCCT.
0413. Weapon and Firing Preparation.
a. Where possible, LSWs are to be prepared for firing prior to moving to
the range, to ensure they are prepared under ideal conditions and not those
that may be experienced on the range.
b. Check each firer has the issued, serviceable hearing protection and his
shooting record card in his possession.
c. Observation of fall of shot is obvious using SUSAT at 25 metres. During
grouping practices it must be emphasized to firers that they are to take the
correct point of aim for each shot and avoid aiming off.
4-2
d.
0414. Aiming Marks. The POA is to be the bottom centre of the patch for Iron
sights and at the bottom right or left corner when optic sights are used.
0415. Coaching. DCC Training, Volume II, Skill at Arms, The SA80 A2 (5.56 mm)
System (Rifle, LSW and Carbine) and Associated Equipment contains full details of
coaching requirements. Some essential points to ensure are:
a. The conducting officer and all coaches on the range must have prior
knowledge of coaching techniques.
b. Where possible a coach should be with each firer. If there are insufficient
coaches the Master Coach system should be used.
c. For ranges up to and including 300 metres, sights are to be set at 300.
Personnel are to be reminded to alter their sights prior to firing at ranges
beyond 300 metres.
d. All group sizes, MPIs, POAs for other positions, and scores are to be
recorded on the firers personal shooting record card.
e. Coaches are to be in possession of binoculars during all elementary
and advanced application of fire lessons.
0416. Spotters. When grouping at 25 metres, to enable firers and coaches to gain
the maximum information from the shots fired, members of the waiting detail should
be employed as spotters, using binoculars, to plot the arrival of each shot or burst. To
achieve maximum value from this type of live firing, it is essential that firers are given
every opportunity to discuss the results of their shooting with their coach.
0417. Guide to Progress. Firers who do not attain the suggested measure of pro
gress should be given further coaching or firing practice before progressing.
0418. Scoring. Scores are to be recorded and announced to the firers at the end
of each practice. Details of the scoring system are shown in each individual lesson.
0419. End of Lesson Procedure. At the end of each LF lesson the following drills
are to be completed once the range has been cleared:
a.
b.
c.
Pack kit.
4-3
4-4
WHTs LSW
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Test No. 1
Safety
LSW unloaded. Safety Catch at F, change lever at R. Weapon lying on
the ground.
1. Order the firer to Take control of the weapon. The firer, without
further direction, is to pick up the weapon and carry out full normal safety
precautions.
1. Standard:
Pass
Fail
Test No. 2
Stripping, Cleaning and Assembling
LSW with sling fitted, unloaded, cleaning roll (with combination tool out),
flannelette and oil.
1. Order the firer to Strip the LSW as for daily cleaning. Ask the following
questions:
a. What size flannelette is used to clean the barrel?
b. What size flannelette is used to oil the barrel?
c. What are the differences to normal daily cleaning when in the following
conditions? (choose any 2 conditions)
(1) Heavy rain and damp conditions.
(2) Dry, sandy or dusty conditions.
(3) Cold and extreme cold conditions.
(4) Hot, wet conditions.
2. Order the firer to indicate the parts of the combination tool that are used
to clean the gas plug.
3. Order the firer to Assemble the LSW and carry out the function test
4. Ask the following question:
a. If during the function test, or at any time you notice the change lever overrotates beyond its stops, what action is to be taken..
1. Standard:
Pass 1 to 2 mistakes.
Fail More than 2 mistakes.
2. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Test No. 3
Magazine Filling
30 rounds, magazine.
On the command Go the firer fills his magazine with 30 rounds by hand.
Instructors Note: All ammunition is to be removed from the magazine, fit
depressor.
Standard: No time Limit
4-5
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
4-6
Test No. 4
Loading Prone Bipod Supported Position
LSW, magazine in fastened pouch.
1. Order Bipod Supported Position down.
2. Give the command Load. Pouches must be refastened.
Instructors Note: Load with the magazine fitted with the depressor. Leave
weapon loaded for Test No 5.
1. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions
should be carried out quickly and correctly.
2. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Fail More than 1 mistake.
3. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Test No. 5
Ready Drill Prone Position
LSW loaded (from Test No. 4), representative targets
Once the firer has aligned himself, on to the target order Ready or issue
a range.
1. The actions tested are those relating to the Ready Drill only.
2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions
should be carried out quickly and correctly.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Fail More than 1 mistake.
4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Test No. 6
Immediate Action (IA) and Forward Assist
LSW loaded representative targets
1. Order Fire.
2. Order LSW firing alright LSW stops. Firer to carry out the
IA...Cocking handle fully forward. Firer is to tap forward on the cocking
handle and continue firing.
3. Order LSW fires alright Stop.
1. The actions tested are those relating to the (IA) and Forward Assist
Drills only.
2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions
should be carried out quickly and correctly.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake. Fail More than 1 mistake.
4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Test No. 7
IA and Loose Magazine Drill
LSW loaded, rep- representative targets.
1. Order Fire LSW firing alright LSW stops. Firer to carry out the
IA...Cocking handle fully forward. Firer is to tap forward on the cocking
handle and continue firing.
2. Order LSW still fails to fire.
3. On examination of body and chamber order Rounds in magazine
Chamber clear. Alloy the firer to complete the drill.
4. Order LSW fires alright Stop.
1. The actions tested are those relating to the Loose Magazine Drill only.
2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions
should be carried out quickly and correctly.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake. Fail More than 1 mistake.
4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Test No. 8
IA and Obstruction Drill
LSW loaded, rep- representative targets.
1. Order Fire LSW firing alright LSW stops. Firer to carry out the
IA...Cocking handle NOT fully forward.
2. On examination of the body and chamber, order Obstruction.
3. When the firer has removed the magazine and attempted to clear
the obstruction by hand or using a tool from the maintenance kit, order
Obstruction Clear.
4. When the firer has visually inspected the chamber order Chamber
Clear.
5. Firer is to complete the Obstruction Drill.
6. Order LSW fires alright Stop.
1. The actions tested are those relating to the Obstruction Drill only.
2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions
should be carried out quickly and correctly.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake. Fail More than 1 mistake.
4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
4-7
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
4-8
Test No. 9
IA and Empty Magazine Drill
LSW loaded, rep- representative targets.
1. Instruct the firer to cock the weapon and apply the Holding Open Catch,
with the working parts held to the rear, order Test and adjust fire
LSW firing alright LSW stops.
2. Firer is to carry out the IA...Empty Magazine. Firer is to carry out the
drill for an empty magazine.
3. When the firer has completed the drill and continued firing, order Stop.
1. The actions tested are those relating to the Empty Magazine Drill only.
2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions
should be carried out quickly and correctly.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake. Fail More than 1 mistake.
4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Test No. 10
Unloading
LSW loaded and ready (from Test No. 9)
The test follows on from Test No. 9. Give the command Unload. The test
is not complete until the firer has recovered the ejected round, replaced it
in the magazine and fastened the pouch.
1. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions
should be carried out quickly and correctly.
2. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Fail More than 1 mistake.
3. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
25 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
4-9
25 m Prone
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
25 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
4-10
4-11
Practice 1. Grouping
Range/Positioning
25m Prone
Ammunition
9 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
25 m Prone
Ammunition
3 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
50mm
4-12
100 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
4-13
100 m Prone
Ammunition
9 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Ammunition
9 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Scoring
0455. After the 5 shots the target is lowered and all shot holes are indicated with
spotting discs.
0456. The firer/coach will identify the MPI and establish the new POA.
Firers Goals and Progress
0457. Achieving group sizes in relation to the ESA and applying fire successfully.
End of Lesson Procedure
4-14
Practice Details
0465. Practice details are as follows:
Practice 1. Deliberate Single Rounds
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
200 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
200 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
300 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
4-16
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
400 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
4-17
Scoring
0466. After the 5 shots the target is lowered and all shot holes are indicated with
spotting discs.
0467. The firer/coach will identify the MPI and establish the new POA. Fire a further
5 rounds. After the 5th shot the target is lowered and all shots are indicated with
spotting discs.
Firers Goals and Progress
0468. Achieving group sizes in relation to the ESA and applying fire successfully.
End of Lesson Procedure
4-18
4-19
Practice Details
0477. Practice details are as follows:
Practice 1. Snap Single Rounds
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
100 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
4-20
200 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
200 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Ammunition
10 Rounds
1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11.
2. 1 x 12 second exposure.
1. Firer in the nominated position.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire 10 rounds at the exposure.
4. Target up and hold.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
4-21
300 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
400 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
4-22
Scoring
0478. Scores are to be recorded and announced on conclusion of each practice:
Practices 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8 and 10 One point per hit
Practices 3, 5 and 9
Range
Total
Rounds
OMS
Requirement
HPS
1-3
100m
27
16
23
4-6
200m
27
16
23
7-9
300m
27
16
23
10
400m
12
12
4-23
Range/Target
100 m
Figure 11
100 m
Figure 11
100 m
Figure 11
200 m Figure 11
4-24
Timings
Remarks
UP DOWN
05
10
16
21
25
30
35
40
43
48
UP DOWN
05 26
UP
05
21
37
53
DOWN
11
27
43
59
As for Practice 1.
200 m
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05
19
29
35
45
51
1:01 1:07
200 m
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 18
Up and hold.
300 m
Figure 11
As for Practice 1.
300 m
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 18
300 m
Figure 11
As for Practice 3.
10
400 m
Triple Figure 11
UP
05
17
28
40
DOWN
12
24
35
47
Up and hold.
100 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
4-26
Ammunition
15 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11
Instructions
200 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11
Instructions
Ammunition
15 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11
Instructions
300 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11
Instructions
4-27
Ammunition
15 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11
Instructions
400 m Prone
Ammunition
15 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11
Instructions
4-28
LSW ACMT
A. RCO Notes
0490. Firing Requirement. ACMT is to be fired annually by all personnel whose
personal weapon is the LSW.
0491. Ranges. LSW ACMT can be fired on an ETR, Gallery Range or CGR. Where
the test is fired on ranges converted to SARTS the firing point monitors are to be
positioned where the firers cannot view them.
0492. Ranges. LSW ACMT can be fired on an ETR, GR or CGR.
0493. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 30 minutes to complete.
0494. Stores.
CGR Left Coffin
Right Coffin
Single Figure 11
Triple Figure 11
SARTS 100-300 m
400 m
Figure 11
Figure 11 with triple Figure image on
monitor
0495. Rules.
a. The dress and equipment for this test is to be combat dress, belt order
webbing, combat body armour (as issued), combat helmets and issued,
serviceable hearing protection.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
0496. Time Charts. A time chart is included after the Practice Details.
0497. Ammunition. ACMT 73 rounds.
0498. Magazines. Magazines are to be filled and used in the following order: 17,
17, 27 and 12
4-29
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
4-30
200 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
300 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
4-31
300 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
400 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
04102. Scoring.
Practices 1, 3, 5, 6 and 8 One point per hit.
Practices 2, 4 and 7
4-32
04103. Standard. The OMS for each practice is shown in the table below. If a firer
fails a practice they must reshoot that practice only to achieve the OMS. Firers who
fail are to have coaching before re-testing.
Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
OMS
Requirement
HPS
BCC
1&2
100m
17
13
3&4
200m
17
13
5-7
300m
27
16
23
400m
12
12
4-33
Range/Target
100 m
Figure 11
UP
05
15
23
32
39
DOWN
09
19
27
36
43
100 m
Figure 11
UP
05
21
37
53
DOWN
11
27
43
59
200 m
Figure 11
UP
DOWN
05 21
Up and hold.
200 m
Figure 11
As for Practice 2
300 m
Figure 11
UP
05
17
27
38
47
DOWN
10
22
32
43
52
1. Up and hold.
2. Personnel fire from 400 m
firing point on an ETR.
300 m
Figure 11
UP
DOWN
05 21
1. Up and hold.
2. Personnel fire from 400 m
firing point on an ETR.
300 m
Figure 11
As for Practice 2
400 m
Triple Figure 11
4-34
Timings
UP
05
18
30
41
DOWN
12
25
37
48
Remarks
Up and hold.
4-35
Practice Details
04113. Practice details are as follows:
Practice 1. Deliberate
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 2. Deliberate
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
As per Prac 1
Practice 3. Deliberate
Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
As per Prac 1
Practice 4. Deliberate
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
As per Prac 1
4-36
Assessment Details
04114. Practice details are as follows:
Practice 5. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 6. Rapid
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 7. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 8. Rapid
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
200 m Prone
5 Rounds
1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11.
2. 1 x 12 second exposures.
1. Fire in the nominated position.
2. Order Five Rounds Rapid, Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire five rounds at the exposure.
4. Targets up and hold.
4-37
Scoring
04115. One point per hit.
Standards
04116. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS at each firing distance in Practices 5 to 8. Failure to achieve the OMS at any firing distance will
constitute a failure of the LF lesson, however, only the practices at the firing distances
where the OMS was not met need to be fired again. Firers who fail are to undergo further practice, with coaching for the areas of weakness, before re-testing.
Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
OMS
Requirement
HPS
BCC
5&6
100m
10
10
7&8
200m
10
10
Time Chart
04117. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery
ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be
allowed.
4-38
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
100 m
Figure 12
UP DOWN
05 12
17 24
29 36
41 48
53 1:00
Remarks
100 m
Figure 12
UP DOWN
05 18
Up and hold.
200 m
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 14
19 28
32 41
45 54
59 1:08
200 m
Figure 11
As for Practice 6.
Up and hold.
CHAPTER 5
INFANTRY SECTION DESIGNATED MARKSMAN
(SDM (LSW))
Scope
0501. Chapter 5 sets out all SDM live
firing (LF) lessons to be completed in LFMT
Stages 1, 2 and 3 of Training the Battle
Shot. It includes the application of lessons
to the Infantry and the progression and
frequency with which they are to be fired.
0502. This progression and frequency of
firing is essential for preparing personnel
for the Infantry SDM AnnualCombat
Marksman- ship Test (ACMT) in LFMT Stage
3. It is also essential in preparing the firer for
mandatory TLFTT and LFTT. The detail of
TLFTT and LFTT is in Chapters 10 and 11
respectively.
Contents
SCOPE 5-1
TRAINING AND FIRING SEQUENCE
5-1
SAFETY 5-2
CONDUCT OF LF LESSONS
5-2
5-11
LF LESSON 3
5-13
LF LESSON 4
5-15
LF LESSON 5
5-18
LF LESSON 6
5-20
LF LESSON 7
5-24
ACMT PREPARATION
5-27
ACMT 5-31
CBRN INSTRUCTION/ASSESSMENT
5-37
5-1
Safety
0507. It is mandatory for all firers to have completed WHTs prior to live firing of a
weapon, in order to ensure a minimum standard of safety. Conducting officers must
confirm that all personnel firing any weapon have completed the relevant WHTs prior
to firing.
Conduct of LF Lessons
0508. General Requirements. The general requirements of equipment and outline range procedures which apply to all ranges are shown below. Any requirements
specific to a particular LF lesson are contained at the start of each lesson.
0509. Stores. The following stores are required:
SDM (LSW)) complete to CES
Cleaning material
Issued, serviceable hearing protection
Combat Helmets
Issued Body Armour
Personal Shooting Record Book
Coachs Aide Memoire (AF B71158)
Binoculars
First aid kit
SAC
Stop watches
1 per firer
As required
1 per firer
1 per firer
1 per firer
1 per firer
1 per coach
1 per coach
Complete
As required
As required
0510. Dress. The dress for (SDM (LSW)) LF lessons should include belt order
webbing, Combat Helmets and body armour). Additionally, when OSPREY, Mark 7
helmets, ballistic eye protection and (SDM (LSW)) ancillaries are issued, the firer
should be given the opportunity to practice with them. The dress rules for Phase One
Recruits and Trainee Combat Infantrymen should be applied sensibly with a gradual
increase in the amount of additional equipment. However, the conditions for the ACMT
are to be rigorously applied.
0511. DCCT. Personnel are to fire the boresighting practice before firing any other
shoots using DCCT. Firers can be given a preview of all the practices on DCCT in
order to familiarise themselves with the conditions.
0512. SAC. The SAC is to be used to bore sight the rifle prior to firing a grouping
practice. Once zeroed, the Personal Zeroing Position (PZP) is to be noted in the firers
shooting record card and the reading is to be checked prior to any future live firing
lesson. The SAC cannot be used for lessons fired on DCCT.
0513. Weapon and Firing Preparation.
a. Where possible, SDM (LSW)s are to be prepared for firing prior to
moving to the range, to ensure they are prepared under ideal conditions and
not those that may be experienced on the range.
5-2
b. Check each firer has the issued, serviceable hearing protection and his
shooting record card in his possession.
c. Observation of fall of shot is obvious using SUSAT at 25 metres. During
grouping practices it must be emphasized to firers that they are to take the
correct point of aim for each shot and avoid aiming off.
d.
0514. Aiming Marks. The POA is to be the bottom centre of the patch for Iron
sights and at the bottom right or left corner when optic sights are used.
0515. Coaching. DCC Training, Volume II, Skill at Arms, The SA80 A2 (5.56 mm)
System (Rifle, LSW and Carbine) and Associated Equipment contains full details of
coaching requirements. Some essential points to ensure are:
a. The conducting officer and all coaches on the range must have prior
knowledge of coaching techniques.
b. Where possible a coach should be with each firer. If there are insufficient
coaches the Master Coach system should be used.
c. For ranges up to and including 300 metres, sights are to be set at 300.
Personnel are to be reminded to alter their sights prior to firing at ranges
beyond 300 metres.
d. All group sizes, MPIs, POAs for other positions, and scores are to be
recorded on the firers personal shooting record card.
e. Coaches are to be in possession of binoculars during all elementary
and advanced application of fire lessons.
0516. Spotters. When grouping at 25 metres, to enable firers and coaches to gain
the maximum information from the shots fired, members of the waiting detail should
be employed as spotters, using binoculars, to plot the arrival of each shot or burst. To
achieve maximum value from this type of live firing, it is essential that firers are given
every opportunity to discuss the results of their shooting with their coach.
0517. Guide to Progress. Firers who do not attain the suggested measure of pro
gress should be given further coaching or firing practice before progressing.
0518. Scoring. Scores are to be recorded and announced to the firers at the end
of each practice. Details of the scoring system are shown in each individual lesson.
0519. End of Lesson Procedure. At the end of each LF lesson the following drills
are to be completed once the range has been cleared:
a.
b.
c.
Pack kit.
5-4
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Test No. 1
Safety
SDM (LSW) unloaded. Safety Catch at F, change lever at R. Weapon
lying on the ground.
1. Order the firer to Take control of the weapon. The firer, without
further direction, is to pick up the weapon and carry out full normal safety
precautions
1. Standard:
Pass
Fail
Test No. 2
Stripping, Cleaning and Assembling
SDM (LSW) with sling fitted, unloaded, cleaning roll (with combination tool
out), flannelette and oil.
1. Order the firer to Strip the SDM (LSW) as for daily cleaning. Ask the
following questions:
a. What size flannelette is used to clean the barrel?
b. What size flannelette is used to oil the barrel?
c. What are the differences to normal daily cleaning when in the following
conditions? (choose any 2 conditions)
(1) Heavy rain and damp conditions.
(2) Dry, sandy or dusty conditions.
(3) Cold and extreme cold conditions.
(4) Hot, wet conditions.
2. Order the firer to indicate the parts of the combination tool that are used
to clean the gas plug.
3. Order the firer to Assemble the SDM (LSW) and carry out the
function test.
4. Ask the following question:
a. If during the function test, or at any time you notice the change lever
over-rotates beyond its stops, what action is to be taken.
1. Standard: Pass 1 to 2 mistakes.
Fail More than 2 mistakes.
2. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Test No. 3
Magazine Filling
30 rounds, magazine, stopwatch.
On the command Go the firer fills his magazine with 30 rounds by hand.
Instructors Note: All ammunition is to be removed from the magazine, fit
depressor.
Standard:
Pass Less than 75 seconds.
Fail Over 75 seconds.
5-5
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
5-6
Test No. 4
Loading Prone Bipod Supported Position
SDM (LSW), one magazine in fastened pouch.
1. Order Bipod Supported
Position down.
2. Give the command Load. Pouches must be refastened.
Instructors Note: Leave weapon loaded for Test No 5.
1. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions
should be carried out quickly and correctly.
2. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Fail More than 1 mistake.
3. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Test No. 5
Ready Drill Prone Position
SDM (LSW) loaded (from Test No. 4), representative targets
Once the firer has aligned himself, on to the target order Ready or issue
a range.
1. The actions test- ed are those relating to the Ready Drill only.
2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions
should be carried out quickly and correctly.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Fail More than 1 mistake.
4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Test No. 6
Immediate Action (IA) Forward Assist
SDM (LSW) loaded representative targets
1. Order Fire.
2. Order SDM (LSW) firing alright SDM (LSW) stops. Firer to carry
out the IA...Cocking handle fully forward. Firer is to tap forward on the
cocking handle and continue firing.
3. Order SDM (LSW) fires alright Stop.
1. The actions tested are those relating to the (IA) and Forward Assist Drills
only.
2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions
should be carried out quickly and correctly.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Fail More than 1 mistake.
4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Test No. 7
IA and Loose Magazine Drill
SDM (LSW) loaded, - representative targets.
1. Order Fire SDM (LSW) firing alright SDM (LSW) stops. Firer to
carry out the IA...Cocking handle fully forward. Firer is to tap forward
on the cocking handle and continue firing.
2. Order SDM (LSW) still fails to fire.
3. On examination of body and chamber order Rounds in magazine
chamber clear. Alloy the firer to complete the drill and fire.
4. Order SDM (LSW) fires alright Stop.
1. The actions tested are those relating to the Loose Magazine Drill only.
2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions
should be carried out quickly and correctly.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Fail More than 1 mistake.
4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Test No. 8
IA and Obstruction Drill
SDM (LSW) loaded, representative targets.
1. Order Fire SDM (LSW) firing alright SDM (LSW) stops. Firer to
carry out the IA...Cocking handle NOT fully forward.
2. On examination of the body and chamber, order Obstruction.
3. When the firer has removed the magazine and attempted to clear
the obstruction by hand or using a tool from the maintenance kit, order
Obstruction Clear.
4. When the firer has visually inspected the chamber order Chamber
Clear.
5. Firer is to complete the Obstruction Drill.
6. Order SDM (LSW) fires alright Stop.
1. The actions tested are those relating to the Obstruction Drill only.
2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions
should be carried out quickly and correctly.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Fail More than 1 mistake.
4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
5-7
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
5-8
Test No. 9
IA and Empty Magazine Drill
SDM (LSW) loaded, representative targets.
1. Instruct the firer to cock the weapon and apply the Holding Open Catch,
with the working parts held to the rear, order Test and adjust fire
SDM (LSW) firing alright SDM (LSW) stops.
2. Firer is to carry out the IA...Empty Magazine. Firer is to carry out the
drill for an empty magazine.
3. When the firer has completed the drill and continues firing, order SDM
(LSW) fires alright Stop.
1. The actions tested are those relating to the Empty Magazine Drill only.
2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions
should be carried out quickly and correctly.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Fail More than 1 mistake.
4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Test No. 10
Unloading
SDM (LSW) loaded and ready (from Test No. 9)
The test follows on from Test No. 9. Give the command Unload. The test
is not complete until the firer has recovered the ejected round, replaced it
in the magazine and fastened the pouch.
1. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions
should be carried out quickly and correctly.
2. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake. Fail More than 1 mistake.
3. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
25 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
5-9
25 m Prone
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
25 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
5-10
5-11
Practice 1. Grouping
Range/Positioning
25m Prone
Ammunition
9 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
25 m Prone
Ammunition
3 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
5-12
Stores.
Normal Range Stores
2 x 1.220m screens with Figure 11 per firer or
1 x Figure 12d per firer (onSARTSconverted range)
20 rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer
Preliminaries
0552. Safety. Normal safety precautions.
0553. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the Range
Safety Rules (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)).
Practice Details
0554. Practice details as follows:
Practice 1. Grouping
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
5-13
Practice 2. Grouping
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Standards
0555. The group sizes that should be achieved are:
Practice 1 150 mm
Practice 2 150 mm
End of Lesson Procedure
5-14
Stores.
Normal range stores
Gallery Range or CGR without SARTS
100-300 m
1 x Figure 11 on a 1.220 m screen per firer inscribed
with a 760 mm and a 1.220 m circle
400 m
1 x Triple Figure 11 per firer
CGR and ETR fitted with SARTS
CGR Left CoffinTriple Figure 11 } In each
Right CoffinSingle Figure 11 } lane ETR
100m and 200m Single Figure 11
300mTriple Figure 11
or
SARTS converted range
SARTS Figure 11 with scoring area image on monitor (100-200 metres)
SARTS Figure 11 with triple Figure 11 image on monitor (300-400 metres)
35 rounds 5.56 mm 4B1T ammunition per firer
(Ball ammunition if tracer ban is in force)
5-15
Practice 1. Grouping
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 2. Deliberate
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3. Deliberate
Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4. Deliberate
Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
5-16
Practice 5. Deliberate
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 6. Deliberate
Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 7. Deliberate
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Scoring
0563. After the 5 shots the target is lowered and all shot holes are indicated with
spotting discs.
0564. The firer/coach will identify the MPI and establish the new POA. Fire a further
5 rounds. After the 5th shot the target is lowered and all shots are indicated with
spotting discs.
Firers Goals and Progress
0565. Achieving group sizes in relation to the ESA and applying fire successfully.
End of Lesson Procedure
5-17
Stores.
Normal range stores
Gallery Range
1 x Figure 11 on a 1.220 m screen per firer inscribed with a 760 mm and a
1.220 m circle
1 x Triple Figure 11 per firer
or
SARTSConverted Range
1 x Figure 11 per firer with Triple Figure 11 image on monitor
35 rounds 5.56 mm 4B1T ammunition per firer
(Ball ammunition if tracer ban is in force)
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
5-18
400 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11
Instructions
500 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11
Instructions
600 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11
Instructions
Scoring
0573. After the 5 shots the target is lowered and all shot holes are indicated with
spotting discs.
0574. The firer/coach will identify the MPI and establish the new POA. Fire a further
5 rounds. After the 5th shot the target is lowered and all shots are indicated with
spotting discs.
Firers Goals and Progress
0575. Achieving group sizes in relation to the ESA and applying fire successfully.
End of Lesson Procedure
5-19
0579. Timing.
practices.
0580.
Stores.
Normal range stores
1 x Figure 11 on a 1.220 m screen per firer inscribed with a 760 mm and a
1.220 m circle
ETR
1 x Figure 11 at 100/200 metres
1 x Triple Figure 11 at 300 metres CGR Left Coffin - Triple Figure 11 } In each
Right Coffin - Single Figure 11 } lane Gallery Range
1 x Figure 11 per firer at 100-300 metres
1 x Triple Figure 11 per firer at 400 metres or
SARTS converted range
SARTS Figure 11 per firer at 100-300 metres
SARTS Figure 11 with triple Figure 11 image on monitor per firer at 400
metres
62 rounds 5.56 mm 4B1T ammunition per firer
(Ball ammunition if tracer ban is in force)
Practice 1. Grouping
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 2. Snap
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3. Rapid
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4. Snap
Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
5-21
Practice 5. Rapid
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
1. Figure 11 or SARTSFigure 11.
2. 1 x 12 second exposure.
1. Firer in the nominated position.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire 10 rounds at the exposure.
4. Targets up and hold.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 6. Snap
Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
1. Figure 11 or SARTSFigure 11.
2. 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals
1. Firer in the nominated position.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire one round at each exposure.
4. Targets fall when hit.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 7. Rapid
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
1. Figure 11 or SARTSFigure 11.
2. 1 x 12 second exposure.
1. Firer in the nominated position.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire 10 rounds at the exposure.
4. Targets up and hold.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 8. Snap
Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds
1. Triple Figure 11 or SARTSFigure 11.
2. 4 x 6 second exposures with irregular intervals
1. Firer in the nominated position.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire 3 rounds at each exposure.
4. Targets up and hold.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Scoring
0585. Scores are to be recorded and announced at the conclusion of each
practice.
Practices 2 to 8 One point per hit.
5-22
Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
OMS
Requirement
HPS
DCC
2&3
100m
15
11
15
4&5
200m
15
11
15
6&7
300m
15
11
15
400m
12
12
Range/Target
Timings
100 m Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 10
16 21
25 30
35 40
43 48
Remarks
100 m Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 26
Up and Hold
200 m Figure 11
As for Practice 2.
200 m Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 18
Up and Hold
300 m Figure 11
(200m bank of tgts)
As for Practice 2.
300 m Figure 11
(200m bank of tgts)
UP DOWN
05 18
1. Up and hold.
2. Personnel fire from the
400 m firing point on an ETR
with or without SARTS.
400 m Triple
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 12
17 24
28 35
40 47
Up and Hold
5-23
0590. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 20 minutes to complete all
practices.
0591. Stores.
Normal range stores
ETR
1 x Figure 11 on a 1.220 m screen per firer inscribed with a 760 mm and a
1.220 m circle
1 x Triple Figure 11 per firer
or
SARTS converted range
SARTS Figure 11 with triple Figure 11 image on monitor per firer
41 rounds 5.56 mm 4B1T ammunition per firer
(Ball ammunition if tracer ban is in force)
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
5-24
Practice 2. Snap
Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3. Snap
Range/Positioning
500 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4. Snap
Range/Positioning
600 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Scoring
0595. Scores are to be recorded and announced at the conclusion of each
practice.
Practices 2 to 4 One point per hit.
Firers Goals and Progress
0596. The OMS for each practice or group of practices shown in the table below is
a guide to progress.
5-25
Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
OMS
Requirement
HPS
DCC
400m
12
12
500m
12
12
600m
12
12
Range/Target
Timings
400 m Triple
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 12
22 29
39 46
56 1:03
500 m Triple
Figure 11
As for Practice 2.
Up and Hold
600 m Triple
Figure 11
As for Practice 2.
Up and Hold
5-26
Remarks
Up and Hold
5-27
100 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
5-28
200 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11
Instructions
300 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11
Instructions
400 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11
Instructions
500 m Prone
Ammunition
10 rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11
Instructions
5-29
600 m Prone
Ammunition
10 rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11
Instructions
5-30
SDM ACMT
A. RCO Notes
05107. Firing Requirement. SDM (LSW)) ACMT is to be fired annually by all
combat infantrymen who are appointed SDM.
05108. Ranges. SDM ((LSW)) ACMT can be fired on an ETR, Gallery Range or
CGR. Where the test is fired on ranges converted to SARTS, the firing point monitors
are to be positioned where the firers cannot view them.
05109. Stores. CGRs and ETRs are to be rigged as follows:
CGR.
Right Coffin
Left Coffin
ETR.
Single Figure 11
Triple Figure 11
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
05113. Time Charts. Time charts for the ACMT are included after the Practice
Details.
05114. Ammunition. ACMT 85 rounds including grouping.
5-31
Preliminaries
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice Details
05118. Practice details are as follows:
Practice 1. Snap
Range/Positioning
600 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 2. Rapid
Range/Positioning
500 m Prone
Ammunition
9 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
5-32
Practice 3. Snap
Range/Positioning
500 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4. Snap
Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 5. Rapid
Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
5-33
Practice 6. Snap
Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 7. Rapid
Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 8. Snap
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
5-34
05120. Standard. The OMS for each practice is shown in the table below. If a firer
fails a practice they must reshoot that practice only to achieve the OMS. Firers who
fail are to have coaching before re-testing.
Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
OMS
Requirement
HPS
DCC
600m
12
12
500m
21
15
21
400m
12
12
300m
20
14
20
200m
10
10
100m
5-35
5-36
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
Remarks
600 m Triple
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 12
19 26
30 37
42 49
Up and hold.
500 m Triple
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 18
28 35
39 46
Up and hold.
500 m Triple
Figure 11
As for Practice 1.
Up and hold.
400 m Triple
Figure 11
As for Practice 1.
Up and hold.
300 m Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 26
1. Up and hold.
2. Personnel fire from the
400 m firing point on an
ETR.
300 m Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 18
25 30
35 40
46 51
55 1:00
1. Up and hold.
2. Personnel fire from the
400 m firing point on an
ETR.
200 m Figure 11
As for Practice 5.
Up and hold.
100 m Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 17
24 28
33 37
43 47
51 55
Up and hold.
5-37
Practice Details
05130. Practice details are as follows:
Practice 1. Deliberate
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 2. Deliberate
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
As per Prac 1
Practice 3. Deliberate
Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
As per Prac 1
Practice 4. Deliberate
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
As per Prac 1
5-38
Assessment Details
05131. Practice details are as follows:
Practice 5. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 6. Rapid
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 7. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 8. Rapid
Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
5-39
Scoring
05132. One point per hit.
Standards
05133. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS at each firing distance in Practices 5 to 8. Failure to achieve the OMS at any firing distance will
constitute a failure of the LF lesson, however, only the practices at the firing distances
where the OMS was not met need to be fired again. Firers who fail are to undergo
further practice, with coaching for the areas of weakness, before re-testing.
Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
OMS Requirement
5&6
100m
10
10
7&8
200m
10
10
DCC
HPS
Time Chart
05134. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery
ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be
allowed.
5-40
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
100 m
Figure 12
UP DOWN
05 12
17 24
29 36
41 48
53 1:00
100 m
Figure 12
UP DOWN
05 18
Up and hold.
200 m
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 14
19 28
32 41
45 54
59 1:08
200 m
Figure 11
As for Practice 6.
Remarks
Up and hold.
CHAPTER 6
SHARPSHOOTER RIFLE 7.62MM L129A1
Scope
0601. Chapter 6 sets out all L129A1
live firing (LF) lessons to be completed in
LFMT Stages 1, 2 and 3 of Training the
Battle Shot. It includes the application of
lessons to the Arms and Services and the
progression and frequency with which they
are to be fired.
0602. This progression and frequency
of firing is essential for preparing
personnel for the L129A1 Annual Combat
Marksmanship Test (ACMT) in LFMT Stage
3. It is also essential in preparing the firer
for mandatory TLFTT and LFTT. The actual
detail of TLFTT and LFTT are in Chapters
10 and 11 respectively.
Contents
SCOPE 6-1
TRAINING AND FIRING SEQUENCE
6-1
SAFETY 6-2
CONDUCT OF LF LESSONS
6-2
WEAPON HANDLING TESTS GENERAL
INSTRUCTIONS 6-4
DEFINITION OF STANDARDS
6-4
WHTs 6-5
LF LESSON 1
6-8
LF LESSON 2
6-11
LF LESSON 3
6-14
LF LESSON 4
6-16
LF LESSON 5
6-20
LF LESSON 6
6-23
ACMT PREPARATION
6-25
ACMT 6-29
CBRN INSTRUCTION/ASSESSMENT
6-35
6-1
Safety
0607. It is mandatory for all firers to have completed WHTs prior to live firing of a
weapon, in order to ensure a minimum standard of safety. Conducting officers must
confirm that all personnel firing any weapon have completed the relevant WHTs prior
to firing.
Conduct of LF Lessons
0608. General Requirements. The general requirements of equipment and outline range procedures which apply to all ranges are shown below. Any requirements
specific to a particular LF lesson are contained at the start of each lesson.
0609. Stores. The following stores are required:
L129A1 complete to CES
Cleaning material
Issued, serviceable hearing protection
Combat Helmets
Body Armour
Personal Shooting Record Book
Coachs Aide Memoire (AF B71158)
Binoculars
First aid kit
SAC
Stop watch
1 per firer
As required
1 per firer
1 per firer
1 per firer
1 per firer
1 per coach
1 per coach
Complete
As required
As required
0610. Dress. Dress for L129A1 LF lessons should include belt order webbing.
Combat helmets and body armour are to be worn for all DCCT and LF lessons.
0611. DCCT (Once Programmed). Personnel are to fire the bore sighting practice
before firing any other shoots using DCCT. Firers can be given a preview of all the
practices on DCCT in order to familiarise themselves with the conditions.
0612. Small Arms Collimator (SAC).. The SAC is to be used to bore sight the
L129A1 prior to firing a grouping practice. Once zeroed, the PZP reading from SAC is
to be noted in the firers shooting record card and the reading is to be checked prior to
any future LF lesson. The SAC cannot be used for lessons fired on DCCT.
0613. Weapon and Firing Preparation.
a. Where possible, weapons are to be prepared for firing prior to moving
to the range, to ensure they are prepared under ideal conditions and not
those that may be experienced on the range.
b. Check each firer has the issued, serviceable hearing protection and his
shooting record card in his possession.
6-2
0614. Aiming Marks. Aiming Marks. Where white patches are used the POA is to
be the bottom centre of the white patch.
0615. Coaching. Ref D contains full details of coaching requirements. Some
essential points to ensure are:
a. The conducting officer and all coaches on the range must have prior
knowledge of coaching techniques.
b. Where possible a coach should be with each firer. If there are insufficient
coaches the Master Coach system should be used.
c. All group sizes, MPIs, POAs for other positions, and scores are to be
recorded on the firers personal shooting record card.
d. Coaches are to be in possession of binoculars during all elementary
and advanced application of fire lessons.
0616. Spotters. When grouping at 25 metres, to enable firers and coaches to gain
the maximum information from the shots fired, members of the waiting detail should
be employed as spotters, using binoculars, to plot the arrival of each shot or burst. To
achieve maximum value from this type of live firing, it is essential that firers are given
every opportunity to discuss the results of their shooting with their coach.
0617. Guide to Progress. Firers who do not attain the suggested measure of pro
gress should be given further coaching or firing practice before progressing.
0618. Scoring. Scores are to be recorded and announced to the firers at the end
of each practice. Details of the scoring system are shown in each individual lesson.
0619. End of Lesson Procedure. At the end of each LF lesson the following drills
are to be completed once the range has been cleared:
a.
b.
c.
Pack kit.
6-3
6-4
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Test No. 1
Safety
Rifle unloaded. Weapon lying on the ground.
1. Order the firer to Take control of the weapon. The firer, without
further direction, is to pick up the weapon and carry out full normal safety
precautions
1. Standard:
Pass
Fail
Test No. 2
Stripping, Cleaning and Assembling
Rifle with sling fitted, unloaded, cleaning roll (with combination tool out),
flannelette and oil.
1. Order the firer to Strip the Rifle as for daily cleaning. Ask the
following questions:
a. What size flannelette is used to clean the barrel?
b. What size flannelette is used to oil the barrel?
c. What are the differences to normal daily cleaning when in the following
conditions? (choose any 2 conditions)
(1) Heavy rain and damp conditions.
(2) Dry, sandy or dusty conditions.
(3) Cold and extreme cold conditions.
(4) Hot, wet conditions.
2. Order the firer to Assemble the Rifle and carry out the function test.
1. Standard:
Pass Up to 2 mistakes.
Fail More than 2 mistakes.
2. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Test No. 3
Magazine Filling
20 rounds, magazine, stopwatch.
On the command Go the firer fills his magazine with 20 rounds by hand.
Instructors Note: All ammunition is to be removed from the magazine on
completion, fit depressor.
No time limit
6-5
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
6-6
Test No. 4
Loading
Rifle, one magazine in fastened pouch.
1. Give the command Load. Pouches must be refastened.
Instructors Note: Leave weapon loaded for Test No 5.
1. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions
should be carried out quickly and correctly.
2. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Fail More than 1 mistake.
3. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Test No. 5
Ready Drill
Rifle loaded (from Test No. 4), representative targets
1. Order Prone position down.
Once the firer has aligned himself, on to the target order Ready or issue
a range.
1. The actions tested are those relating to the Ready Drill only.
2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions
should be carried out quickly and correctly.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Fail More than 1 mistake.
4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Test No. 6
Immediate Action (IA) and Loose Magazine
Rifle loaded representa- tive targets
1. Order Fire Rifle firing alright Rifle stops. Firer to carry out the
IA.
2. On examination of the body and chamber, orderRounds in the
magazine no rounds in the chamber the firer is to check the magazine
is correctly fitted operate the bolt release catch and continue firing.
3. Order Rifle fires alright Stop.
1. The actions tested are those relating to the (IA) and loose magazine
only .
2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions
should be carried out quickly and correctly.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Fail More than 1 mistake.
4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Test No. 7
IA and Obstruction Drill
Rifle loaded, representative targets.
1. Order Fire Rifle firing alright Rifle stops. Firer to carry out the
IA.
2. On examination of the body and chamber, order Obstruction.
3. When the firer has removed the magazine and attempted to clear
the obstruction by hand or using a tool from the maintenance kit, order
Obstruction Clear.
4. When the firer has visually inspected the chamber, order Chamber
Clear.
5. Firer is to complete the Obstruction Drill.
6. Order Stop.
1. The actions tested are those relating to the Obstruction Drill only.
2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions
should be carried out quickly and correctly.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Fail More than 1 mistake.
4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Test No. 8
IA and Empty Magazine Drill
Rifle loaded, representative targets.
1. Instruct the firer to cock the weapon and apply the Bolt Release Catch,
with the working parts held to the rear, order Test and adjust
Fire Rifle firing alright rifle stops.
2. Firer is to carry out the IA...Empty Magazine. Firer is to carry out the
drill for an empty magazine.
3. When the firer has completed the drill and continued firing, order Stop.
1. The actions tested are those relating to the Empty Magazine Drill only.
2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions
should be carried out quickly and correctly.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Fail More than 1 mistake.
4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Test No. 9
Unloading
Rifle loaded and ready
The test follows on from Test No. 8. Give the command Unload. The test
is not complete until the firer has recovered the ejected round, replaced it in
the magazine and fastened the pouch.
1. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions
should be carried out quickly and correctly.
2. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Fail More than 1 mistake.
3. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
6-7
6-8
0632. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range
safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21))
Practice Details
0633. Practice details are as follows:
Practice 1. Grouping
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 2. Zeroing
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Ammunition
7 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4. Grouping
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
6-9
Instructions
Practice 5. Grouping
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 6. Grouping
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 7. Grouping
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
6-11
Practice 1. Grouping
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
3 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 2. Deliberate
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 11 on a screen or
SARTS Figure 11
1. Fire 3 rounds application.
2. All shots are to be signalled.
3. Record the score and note the appropriate POA on the shooting
record card.
4. Repeat the practice.
Practice 3. Deliberate
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 11 on a screen or
SARTS Figure 11
1. Fire 3 rounds application.
2. All shots are to be signalled.
3. Record the score and note the appropriate POA on the shooting
record card.
4. Repeat the practice.
Practice 4. Deliberate
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
6-12
Fig 11 on a screen or
SARTS Figure 11
1. Fire 3 rounds application.
2. All shots are to be signalled.
3. Record the score and note the appropriate POA on the shooting
record card.
4. Repeat the practice.
Practice 5. Deliberate
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Fig 11 on a screen or
SARTS Figure 11
1. Fire 3 rounds application.
2. All shots are to be signalled.
3. Record the score and note the appropriate POA on the shooting
record card.
4. Repeat the practice.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 6. Deliberate
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Fig 11 on a screen or
SARTS Figure 11
1. Fire 3 rounds application.
2. All shots are to be signalled.
3. Record the score and note the appropriate POA on the shooting
record card.
4. Repeat the practice.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 7. Deliberate
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Fig 11 on a screen or
SARTS Figure 11
1. Fire 3 rounds application.
2. All shots are to be signalled.
3. Record the score and note the appropriate POA on the shooting
record card.
4. Repeat the practice.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Scoring
0643. After the 3 shots the target is lowered and all shot holes are indicated with
spotting discs.
0644. The firer/coach will identify the MPI and establish the new POA. Fire a further
3 rounds. After the 3rd shot the target is lowered and all shots are indicated with
spotting discs.
Firers Goals and Progress
0645. Achieving group sizes in relation to the ESA and applying fire successfully.
End of Lesson Procedure
6-13
Ammunition
3 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
6-14
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Scoring
0653. After the 3 shots the target is lowered and all shot holes are indicated with
spotting discs.
0654. The firer/coach will identify the MPI and establish the new POA. Fire a further
3 rounds. After the 3rd shot the target is lowered and all shots are indicated with
spotting discs.
Firers Goals and Progress
0655. Achieving group sizes in relation to the ESA and applying fire successfully.
End of Lesson Procedure
6-15
Ammunition
3 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
6-16
Practice 2. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 5. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
6-17
Practice 6. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 7. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 8. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 9. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
6-18
Scoring
0664. Scores are to be recorded and announced at the conclusion of each practice.
Practices 2 to 9 One point per hit.
Firers Goals and Progress
0665. The OMS for each practice or group of practices shown in the table below is
a guide to progress
Total
Rounds
OMS Requirement
100m
200m
12
12
300m
Ser
Range
1
2
3
HPS
LF 4 Time Chart
0666. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain
gallery ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to
be allowed.
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
Remarks
100 m Figure 12
UP DOWN
06 11
16 21
25 30
100 m Figure 12
As for Practice 2.
200 m Figure 12
As for Practice 2.
200 m Figure 12
As for Practice 2.
200 m Figure 12
As for Practice 2.
200 m Figure 12
As for Practice 2.
300 m Figure 12
As for Practice 2.
300 m Figure 12
As for Practice 2.
6-19
6-20
Practice 2. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
400 m Prone
15 Rounds
1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11.
2. 5 x 6 second exposures with intervals of 10 seconds.
1. Firer in the nominated position.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire 3 rounds at each exposure.
4. Targets up and hold.
500 m Prone
15 Rounds
1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11.
2. 5 x 6 second exposures with intervals of 10 seconds.
1. Firer in the nominated position.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire 3 rounds at each exposure.
4. Targets up and hold.
600 m Prone
15 Rounds
1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11.
2. 5 x 6 second exposures with intervals of 10 seconds.
1. Firer in the nominated position.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire 3 rounds at each exposure.
4. Targets up and hold.
Scoring
0675. Scores are to be recorded and announced at the conclusion of each practice.
Practices 2 to 4 One point per hit.
6-21
Range
Total
Rounds
OMS Requirement
HPS
400m
15
12
15
500m
15
11
15
600m
15
11
15
LF 5 Time Chart
0677. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain
gallery ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to
be allowed.
6-22
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
400 m
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 12
23 30
40 47
56 1.03
1.15 1:22
Remarks
500 m
Figure 11
As for Practice 2.
Up and Hold
600 m
Figure 11
As for Practice 2.
Up and Hold
Up and Hold
b.
Firers are to record in their Shooting Record Card any displacement of
the MPI from the CZP when firing from positions other than prone. Coaches
are to emphasise the importance of this to their firers.
Preliminaries
6-23
Practice 2. Grouping
Range/Positioning 50 m Kneeling unsupported /squatting
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Fig 12 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or
Target/ Exposure
SARTS Figure 12d
1. Fire a 3 round group.
2. Discuss the groups and record the group sizes.
Instructions
3. Compare with the MPI achieved in the prone bipod supported
position and note any requirement to aim off.
4. Repeat the practice.
Practice 3. Grouping
Range/Positioning 50 m Standing unsupported
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Fig 12 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or
Target/ Exposure
SARTS Figure 12d
Instructions
As per practice 2
Practice 4. Grouping
Range/Positioning 100 m Kneeling unsupported/squatting
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Fig 12 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or
Target/ Exposure
SARTS Figure 12d
Instructions
As per practice 2
Practice 5. Grouping
Range/Positioning 100 m Sitting unsupported
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Fig 12 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or
Target/ Exposure
SARTS Figure 12d
Instructions
As per practice 2
6-24
6-25
Instructions
6-26
Practice 3. Grouping
Range/Positioning 50 m Standing
Ammunition
3 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Figure 12 or SARTS Figure 12.
1. Firer in the nominated position.
2. Fire 3 rounds application to confirm the MPI.
Instructions
3. If possible the shots are to be signalled or viewed.
4. Record the MPI and POA.
Practice 4. Grouping
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
100 m Standing
3 Rounds
1. Figure 12 or SARTS Figure 12
As per practice 3.
Practice 5. Grouping
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 6. Grouping
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 7. Grouping
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 8. Grouping
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
300 m Sitting
3 Rounds
1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11.
As per practice 3.
6-27
Practice 9. Grouping
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
6-28
L129A1 ACMT
A. RCO Notes
0695. Firing Requirement. The ACMT is to be fired annually by all personnel who
are appointed as Sharpshooters with the 7.62mm Sharpshooter Rifle.
0696. Ranges. The ACMT can be fired on an ETR, Gallery Range or CGR. Where
the test is fired on ranges converted to SARTS, the firing point monitors are to be
positioned where the firers cannot view them.
0697. Stores
CGR.
Right Coffin
Left Coffin
Figure 12
Figure 11
ETR.
100 m
200-600 m
- Figure 12
- Figure 11
SARTS Ranges.
100
200-600 m
SARTS Figure 12
SARTS Figure 11
0698. When fired on an ETR, lane restrictions may apply from the 400m firing point
and beyond.
0699. Timings. It will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. If an
ETR is used, these timings might reduce.
06100. Rules.
a. The dress and equipment for this test is to be combat dress, belt order
webbing, combat helmet, body armour and issued, serviceable hearing
protection.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
06101. Time Charts. Time charts for the ACMT are included after the Practice
Details.
06102. Ammunition. ACMT 61 rounds including grouping.
6-29
Preliminaries
Practice Details
06106. Practice details are as follows:
Practice 1. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 2. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
6-30
50 m Standing
3 Rounds
1. Figure 12 or SARTS Figure 12.
2. 3 x 2 second exposures with irregular intervals
1. Firer in the nominated position.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire 1 round at each exposure.
4. Targets fall when hit
Practice 3. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4. Rapid
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 5. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 6. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
300 m Sitting
3 Rounds
1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11.
2. 3 x 4 second exposures at irregular intervals
1. Firer in the nominated position.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire 1 round at each exposure.
4. Targets fall when hit
6-31
Practice 7. Rapid
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 8. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 9. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Instructions
6-32
Instructions
Scoring
One point per hit.
Standard
06107. The OMS for each practice is shown in the table below. If a firer fails a practice
they must reshoot that practice only to achieve the OMS. Firers who fail are to have
coaching before re-testing.
Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
OMS Requirement
HPS
50m
100m
200m
4&5
200m
300m
300m
300m
400m
10
500
11
600
33
52
Total
6-33
Range/Target
100 m
Figure 12
100 m
Figure 12
200 m
Figure 11
200 m
Figure 11
200 m
Figure 11
4
5
300 m
Figure 11
300 m
Figure 11
300 m
Figure 11
6-34
400 m
Figure 11
10
500 m
Figure 11
11
600 m
Figure 11
Timings
UP DOWN
05
08
19
22
30
33
UP DOWN
05
09
19
23
30
34
UP DOWN
05
13
UP DOWN
05 16
UP DOWN
06
07
11
16
25
30
36
41
UP DOWN
05
10
19
24
30
35
UP DOWN
05 16
UP DOWN
05
06
11
15
UP DOWN
05
10
19
24
30
35
41
46
50
55
UP DOWN
05
14
25
30
40
45
49
54
1.00 1.05
1.07 1.12
As per Practice 10
Remarks
1. Fall when hit
Up and hold
1. Repeat 4 times.
2. Fall when hit
Up and hold
1. Fall when hit
Up and hold
1. Reset and repeat 4 times.
1. Fall when hit
1. Fall when hit
Practice Details
06117. Practice details are as follows:
Practice 1. Deliberate
Range/Positioning 100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 12 on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d
1. Fire 5 rounds application.
2. All shots are to be signalled.
Instructions
3. Record the score and note the appropriate POA on the shooting
record card.
Practice 2. Deliberate
Range/Positioning 100 m Kneeling Unsupported
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 12 on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d
1. Fire 5 rounds application.
2. All shots are to be signalled.
Instructions
3. Record the score and note the appropriate POA on the shooting
record card.
Practice 3. Deliberate
Range/Positioning 200 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a screen or SARTS Figure 11
1. Fire 5 rounds application.
2. All shots are to be signalled.
Instructions
3. Record the score and note the appropriate POA on the shooting
record card.
Practice 4. Deliberate
Range/Positioning 200 m Kneeling Supported
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a screen or SARTS Figure 11
1. Fire 5 rounds application.
2. All shots are to be signalled.
Instructions
3. Record the score and note the appropriate POA on the shooting
record card.
6-36
Assessment Details
06118. Practice details are as follows:
Practice 5. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 6. Rapid
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 7. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 8. Rapid
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
100 m Prone
5 Rounds
1. Figure 12 or SARTS Figure 12d.
2. 1 x 12 second exposure
1. Fire in the nominated position.
2. Order Five rounds rapid, Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire five rounds at the exposure.
4. Targets up and hold.
200 m Prone
5 Rounds
1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11.
2. 1 x 12 second exposures.
1. Fire in the nominated position.
2. Order Five Rounds Rapid, Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire five rounds at the exposure.
4. Targets up and hold.
6-37
Scoring
06119. One point per hit.
Standards
06120. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS at each
firing distance in Practices 5 to 8. Failure to achieve the OMS at any firing distance will
constitute a failure of the LF lesson, however, only the practices at the firing distances
where the OMS was not met need to be fired again. Firers who fail are to undergo furtheir practice, with coaching for the areas of weakness, before re-testing.
Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
OMS Requirement
HPS
5&6
100m
10
10
7&8
200m
10
10
6-38
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
100 m
Figure 12
UP DOWN
05 12
17 24
29 36
41 48
53 1:00
Remarks
100 m
Figure 12
UP DOWN
05 18
Up and hold.
200 m
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 14
19 28
32 41
45 54
59 1:08
200 m
Figure 11
As for Practice 6.
Up and hold.
CHAPTER 7
THE LIGHT MACHINE GUN (LMG)
Scope
0701. Chapter 7 sets out all LMG live
firing (LF) lessons to be completed in
LFMT Stages 1, 2 and 3 of Training the
Battle Shot. It includes the application of
lessons to all Arms and Services and the
progression and frequency with which they
are to be fired.
0702. This progression and frequency
of firing is essential for preparing gunners
for LMG Annual Combat Marksmanship
Test (ACMT) in LFMT Stage 3. It is also
essential in preparing the gunner for
mandatory TLFTT and LFTT. The actual
detail of TLFTT and LFTT is in Chapters 10
and 11 respectively.
Contents
SCOPE 7-1
TRAINING AND FIRING SEQUENCE
7-1
SAFETY 7-1
CONDUCT OF LF LESSONS
7-2
WEAPON HANDLING TESTS GENERAL
INSTRUCTIONS 7-4
DEFINITION OF STANDARDS
7-4
WHTs 7-5
LF LESSON 1
7-7
LF LESSON 2
7-9
LF LESSON 3
7-11
LF LESSON 4
7-14
LF LESSON 5
7-17
LF LESSON 6
7-20
ACMT PREPARATION
7-24
ACMT 7-27
CBRN ASSESSMENT
7-31
Conduct of LF Lessons
0708. General Requirements. The general requirements of equipment and outline range procedures which apply to all ranges are shown below. Any requirements
specific to a particular LF lesson are contained at the start of each lesson.
0709. Stores. The following stores are required:
LMG complete to CES
Cleaning material
Issued, serviceable hearing protection
Combat Helmets
Issued Body Armour
Personal Shooting Record Card (AF B6994A/B)
Coachs Aide Memoire (AF B71158)
Binoculars
First aid kit
SAC
Stop watch
1 per firer
As required
1 per firer
1 per firer
1 per firer
1 per firer
1 per coach
1 per coach
Complete
As required
As required
0710. Dress. Dress for LMG LF lessons should include belt order webbing. Combat
helmets and body armour are to be worn for all DCCT and LF lessons.
0711. DCCT. Gunners are to fire the bore sighting practice before firing any other
shoots using DCCT. Gunners can be given a preview of all the practices on DCCT in
order to familiarise themselves with the conditions.
0712. Sighting System. The LMG can be fitted with iron sights or optic sights.
Initial training should be conducted using the iron sights.
0713. Small Arms Collimator (SAC). SAC is to be used to bore sight the LMG
prior to firing a grouping practice. Once zeroed, the PZP reading fro m SAC is to be
noted in the gunners shooting record card and the reading is to be checked prior to
any future LF lesson.
0714. Weapon and Firing Preparation.
a. Where possible, LMGs are to be prepared for firing prior to moving to
the range, to ensure they are prepared under ideal conditions and not those
that may be experienced on the range.
b. Check each firer has the issued, serviceable hearing protection and his
shooting record card in his possession.
c. During grouping practices it must be emphasized to gunners that they
are to take the correct point of aim for each shot and avoid aiming off.
d.
7-2
0715. Aiming Marks. Where white patches are used the POA is to be the bottom
centre of the white patch.
0716. Coaching. Ref C and the Coaching Aide Memoire contain full details of
coaching requirements. Some essential points to ensure are:
a. The conducting officer and all coaches on the range must have prior
knowledge of coaching techniques.
b. Where possible a coach should be with each firer. If there are insufficient
coaches the Master Coach system should be used.
c. If using Iron sights the aperture marked with 3 is used for all ranges up
to and including 300 metres, for ranges beyond 300 metres use the aperture
marked with 6. If using SUSAT for ranges up to and including 300 metres,
sights are to be set at 300. Gunners are to be reminded to alter their sights
prior to firing at ranges beyond 300 metres.
d. All group sizes, MPIs, POAs for other positions, and scores are to be
recorded on the gunners personal shooting record card.
e. Coaches are to be in possession of binoculars during all elementary
and advanced application of fire lessons.
0717. Spotters. When grouping at 25 metres, to enable gunners and coaches to
gain the maximum information from the shots fired, members of the waiting detail
should be employed as spotters, using binoculars, to plot the arrival of each shot
or burst. To achieve maximum value from this type of live firing, it is essential that
gunners are given every opportunity to discuss the results of their shooting with their
coach.
0718. Gunners Goals and Progress. Gunners who do not attain the required
Gunners Goals and Progress should be given further coaching and firing practice
before firing again.
0719. Scoring. Scores are to be recorded and announced to the gunners at the end
of each practice. Details of the scoring system are shown in each individual lesson.
0720. End of Lesson Procedure. At the end of each LF lesson the following drills
are to be completed once the range has been cleared:
a.
b.
c.
Pack kit.
7-3
b. Results. All results must be recorded in accordance with unit and chain
of command procedures.
0723. Conduct. NSPs are to be carried out by the instructor on all weapons and drill
ammunition prior to any WHT taking place. Tests are to be completed consecutively
and are to be carried out in barracks using drill ammunition.
0724. Dress. Tests are to be carried out wearing belt order webbing with combat
helmet.
Definition of Standards
0725. Handling, Gunners Goals and Progress . Handling Gunners Goals and
Progress achieved in WHTs are defined as:
Pass Pass in all tests.
Fail Fail in any test.
0726. Training Performance Standards. A firer is considered competent on
achieving the pass standard. Failure to meet the pass standard indicates that the firer
is not competent in the use of the LMG. Retesting is to be carried out on completion
of remedial training on the individual test(s) that were failed.
7-4
WHTs LMG
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Test No. 1
Safety
Gun unloaded.
1. Order the firer to Take control of the gun.
2. The firer, without further directive, is to carry out the normal safety
precautions on the gun.
1. Standard:
Pass
Fail
Test No. 2
Stripping Cleaning Assembling
LMG
Spare parts wallet, complete. 1 Spare barrel.
1. Order the firer to strip the gun for daily cleaning. Ask him the
following:
a. What size flannelette is used to oil the bore?
b. What size flannelette is used to oil the cylinder?
2. Order the firer to Assemble the gun and carry out the function test.
1. The main purpose of this test is to assess the firers ability to strip and
assemble the gun. He should therefore be assessed with this in mind.
2. Standard:
Pass 1 to 2 mistakes.
Fail More than 2 mistakes.
3. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Test No. 3
Loading
LMG
Soft pouch containing belt of 15 drill rounds.
Gunner stood behind the gun. Safety catch at Fire. Soft pouch on the
ground on the left of the gun. Order Load.
1. Standard:
Pass 1 to 2 mistakes.
Fail More than 2 mistakes.
2. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Test No. 4
Ready Drill
As for Test No. 3
1. Order 200.
1. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Fail More than 1 mistake.
2. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
7-5
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
7-6
Test No. 5
Immediate Action (IA)
As for Test No. 4
1. Order Fire.
2. Order Gun firing alright - Gun stops. After the Gunner cocks the
gun, order Live Round Ejected. Once the gunner operates the trigger
order Gun fails to fire. Once the gunner has completed the IA Drill,
order Gun fires alright Stop.
1. No time limit is imposed but all actions should be carried out quickly and
correctly.
2. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Fail More than 1 mistake.
3. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Test No. 6
Immediate Action (IA) and Gas Stoppage
As for Test No. 5
1. Order Fire.
2. Order Gun firing alright - Gun stops. After the Gunner cocks the
gun, order Live Round Ejected. Once the gunner operates the trigger
order Gun gunners one or two more rounds and stops again. Once
the gunner cocks the gun, order Live round ejected. After the gunner
changes the barrel and operates the trigger, order Gun fires alright
Stop.
1. No time limit is imposed but all actions should be carried out quickly and
correctly.
2. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Fail More than 1 mistake.
3. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Test No. 7
Unloading
As for Test No. 5
1. Gunner behind the gun loaded with the safety catch applied order
Unload. The test is not complete until the gunner is standing up behind
the gun.
1. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Fail More than 1 mistake.
2. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Preliminaries
0732. Safety. Normal safety precautions (to include checking of barrels for
obstructions).
0733. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate, as necessary, the range
safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21))
0734. Preparing the Gun for Firing. Remind the squad of the procedures for
preparing the gun before firing.
0735. Confirm by practice. Prepare the guns for firing.
Practice Details
0736. Practice details are as follows:
Practice 1. Familiarisation
Range/Positioning
25 m Prone
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fire each belt in one burst. Carry out IA after each expended belt.
7-7
25 m Prone
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3. Confirmation
Range/Positioning
25 m Prone
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
7-8
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
7-9
Practice 2. Grouping
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3. Grouping
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
7-10
0754. Safety. Normal safety precautions (to include checking of barrels for
obstructions).
0755. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range
safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21))
7-11
Practice Details
0756. Practice details are as follows:
Practice 1. Limbering Up
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Stop butt (off the edge of the zeroing screen) If using SARTS range,
firers may engage the target
Instructions
Practice 2. Grouping
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As for Practice 2
Instructions
100m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As for Practice 2
Instructions
As for Practice 2
7-12
100m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As for Practice 2
Instructions
As for Practice 3
100m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As for Practice 2
Instructions
As for Practice 3
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As for Practice 2
Instructions
As for Practice 3
7-13
200 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Double Figure 11
Instructions
7-14
Practice 2. Timed
Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3. Sighting
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Double Figure 11
Instructions
Practice 4. Timed
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Scoring
0767. After each burst the target is lowered and the MPI is indicated with spotting
discs.
Gunners Goals and Progress
0768. Achieving group sizes in relation to the ESA and applying fire successfully.
End of Lesson Procedure
7-15
Range/ Target
200 m Double
Figure 11
200 m Double
Figure 11
Up Down
05 1:07
200 m Double
Figure 11
As for Practice 1.
As for Practice 1.
200 m Double
Figure 11
As for Practice 2.
As for Practice 2.
7-16
Timings
No time limit
Remarks
1. Up and hold.
2. MPI of each burst to be signalled, (2 x
bursts).
1. Up and hold.
2. MPI to be signalled at end of exposure.
300 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11
Instructions
7-17
Practice 2. Timed
Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3. Timed
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4. Sighting
Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11
Instructions
Practice 5. Timed
Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
7-18
Scoring
0779. After each burst the target is lowered and the MPI is indicated with spotting
discs.
Gunners Goals and Progress
0780. Achieving group sizes in relation to the ESA and applying fire successfully.
End of Lesson Procedure
Range/ Target
Timings
Remarks
300 m
Triple Figure 11
No time limit
300 m
Triple Figure 11
Up Down
05 51
1. Up and hold.
2. MPI to be signalled at end of exposure.
300 m
Triple Figure 11
Up Down
05 36
As for Practice 2.
400 m
Triple Figure 11
As for Practice 1.
As for Practice 1.
400 m
Triple Figure 11
As for Practice 2.
As for Practice 2.
1. Up and hold.
2. MPI of each burst to be sig- nalled.
7-19
7-20
Practice 1. Sighting
Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 2. Timed
Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3. Sighting
Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4. Timed
Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
30 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
7-21
Practice 5. Sighting
Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 6. Timed
Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Scoring
0791. Scores are to be recorded and announced on conclusion of each practice:
Practice 2
Practices 4 and 6
Range
Total
Rounds
OMS Requirement
HPS
200m
15
15
300m
30
15
30
400m
20
10
20
7-22
Range/ Target
Timings
Remarks
200 m Double
Figure 11
No time limit
200 m Double
Figure 11
Up Down
05 1:06
Up and Hold.
300 m Triple
Figure 11
As for Practice 1.
As for Practice 1.
300 m Triple
Figure 11
Up Down
05 09
13 17
22 26
34 38
44 48
54 58
400 m Triple
Figure 11
As for Practice 2.
As for Practice 1.
400 m Triple
Figure 11
Up Down
05 10
45 50
1:10 1:15
1:55 2:00
1. Up and hold.
2. MPI of each burst to be signalled.
7-23
100 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
200 m Prone
Ammunition
25 Rounds (Max)
Target/ Exposure
Double Figure 11
Instructions
7-25
300 m Prone
Ammunition
35 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11
Instructions
400m Prone
Ammunition
40 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11
Instructions
Note Targets positioned in the Hythe frames or SARTS on top of the Mantlet may only
be engaged where Range Standing Orders permit their use.
End of Lesson Procedure
7-26
LMG ACMT
A. RCO Notes
07103. Firing Requirement. ACMT. LMG ACMT is to be fired annually by all
personnel whose personal weapon is the LMG.
07104. Ranges. LMG ACMT can be fired on an ETR (with SARTS), a CGR (with
SARTS) or a GR. Where the test is fired on ranges converted to SARTS the firing
point monitors are to be positioned where the gunners cannot view them.
07105. Stores. CGRs and ETRs are to be rigged as follows:
GR
200 m
300-400 m
Double Figure 11
Triple Figure 11
SARTS Ranges
200 m
300-400 m
c.
d.
7-27
Preliminaries
07110. Safety. Normal safety precautions (to include checking of barrels for
obstructions).
07111. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range
safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21))
Practice Details
07112. Practice details are as follows:
Practice 1. Defence
Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
300 m Prone
Ammunition
30 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3. Defence
Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
7-28
Practice 4. Attack
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
a. 400 m Prone
b. 300 m Prone
a. 20 Rounds
b. 20 Rounds
1. Triple Figure 11 at 400 and 300 metres.
2. 1 x 24 second exposure followed by 3 x 4 second exposures with
irregular intervals over a one minute period at each distance.
1. Firer in the prone position at 500 metres, gun loaded with 40
rounds.
2. Order Watch out Advance. Gunners are to advance at the walk.
3. When the gunners are 35 metres from the firing point the RCO is to
signal the targets to be raised.
4. The appearance of the targets is the signal for the gunners to run to
the 400 metre firing point, adopt the prone position, make ready and
fire one burst of 3-5 rounds at each exposure.
5. Targets fall when hit, after the fourth exposure order Prepare to
Move, the gunners are to make safe with a 20 round belt.
6. Order Watch out Advance. Gunners are to advance at the walk.
7. Repeat the procedure at 300 metres.
8. Targets fall when hit.
200 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Scoring
Practice 1
Practices 2, 3, 4 and 5
7-29
Standard
07113. The OMS for each practice is shown in the table below. If a firer fails a practice
they must reshoot that practice only to achieve the OMS. Gunners who fail are to have
coaching before re-testing.
Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
OMS Requirement
HPS
1&5
200m
40
20
40
2&4b
300m
50
25
50
3&4a
400m
40
20
40
Range/ Target
200 m Double
Figure 11
Up Down
05 1:06
Up and hold.
300 m
Triple Figure 11
Up Down
05 09
13 17
22 26
31 35
45 49
56 1:00
400 m
Triple Figure 11
Up Down
05 10
45 50
1:10 1:15
1:55 2:00
4a
400 m
Triple Figure 11
Up Down
05 30
38 43
48 53
1.00 1:05
4b
300 m Triple
Figure 11
As for Practice 4a
200 m Double
Figure 11
Up Down
05 07
37 42
50 55
1:10 1:15
1:25 1:30
7-30
Timings
Remarks
07121. Safety. Normal safety precautions (to include checking of barrels for
obstructions).
07122. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range
safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21))
Practice Details
07123. Practice details are as follows:
Practice 1. Sighting
Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
7-31
Practice 2. Timed
Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3. Sighting
Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4. Timed
Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 5. Rapid
Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
7-32
Practice 6. Snap
Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
30 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 7. Snap
Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 8. Snap
Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
30 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Scoring
07124. Sighting practices are not scored.
Practices 2, 4, 5 and 6 1 point per hit.
Practices 7 and 8
Standard
07125. The OMS for each practice is shown in the table below. If a firer fails a practice
they must reshoot that practice only to achieve the OMS. Gunners who fail are to have
coaching before re-testing.
7-33
Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
OMS Requirement
HPS
5&6
200m
50
30
50
7&8
300m
50
30
50
Time Chart
07126. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery
ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be
allowed.
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
Remarks
200 m
Double Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 1.06
1. Up and hold.
2. MPI of each burst to be
signalled, (2 x bursts).
200 m
Double Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 36
300 m
Triple Figure 11
As for Practice 1.
1. Up and hold.
2. MPI to be signalled at end of
exposure.
As for Practice 1.
300 m
Triple Figure 11
As for Practice 2.
As for Practice 2.
200 m
Double Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 1:06
Up and hold.
200 m
Double Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 10
15 20
24 29
33 38
44 49
1.00 1.05
300 m
Triple Figure 11
300 m
Triple Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 10
15 20
26 31
35 40
As for Practice 6.
7-34
CHAPTER 8
SERVICE PISTOL
Scope
0801. Chapter 8 sets out all Service Pistol
live firing (LF) lessons to be completed in
LFMT Stages 1, 2 and 3 of Training the
Battle Shot. It includes the application of
the lessons to all Arms and Services and
the progression and frequency with which
they are to be fired.
0802. This progression and frequency of
firing is essential for preparing personnel for
the Pistol Annual Combat Marksmanship
Test (ACMT) in LFMT Stage 3.
Pistol Users
Contents
SCOPE 8-1
PISTOL USERS
8-1
TRAINING AND FIRING SEQUENCE
8-1
SAFETY 8-1
CONDUCT OF LF LESSONS
8-2
WEAPON HANDLING TESTS GENERAL
INSTRUCTIONS 8-3
DEFINITION OF STANDARDS
8-4
WHTs 8-4
LF LESSON 1
8-7
LF LESSON 2
8-10
LF LESSON 3
8-11
LF LESSON 4
8-13
LF LESSON 5
8-15
LF LESSON 6
8-17
ACMT PREPARATION
8-20
ACMT 8-22
CBRN ASSESSMENT
8-26
0804. Service Pistol User Initial Training. The LF lessons listed within the
Commanders Guide are to be fired by all personnel during initial training of the Service
Pistol. Reserve personnel are to achieve the same firers Goals and Progress as
regular personnel:
0805. Regular and Reserve Units. The ACMTPreparation is to be fired annually
by all personnel in Regular and Reserve units who are issued with the Service Pistol.
0806. ACMT Familiarisation with DCCT. After the ACMT Preparation and before
the ACMT is fired on the range, use of DCCT to familiarise firers with the ACMT
Practices will improve First Time Pass rates and the overall standard of shooting.
0807. Remedial Training. DCCT provides invaluable aids to the remedial training
of the poor shot. COs are encouraged to make full use of the facilities wherever they
are available. However, final confirmation must be by the use of live firing.
Safety
0808. It is mandatory for all firers to have completed WHTs prior to their first live
firing of a weapon, in order to ensure a minimum standard of safety. Conducting
officers must confirm that all firers firing any weapon for the first time have completed
the relevant WHTs prior to firing.
8-1
Conduct of LF Lessons
0809. General Requirements. The general requirements of equipment and outline range procedures which apply to all ranges are shown below. Any requirements
specific to a particular LF lesson are contained at the start of each lesson.
0810. Stores. The following stores are required:
Pistols with holsters
Magazines
Cleaning rods
Cleaning materials
Issued, serviceable hearing protection
Helmets Combat
Issued Combat Body Armour
Personal Shooting Record Book
Coaches Aide Memoire (AF B71158)
First aid kit
Stopwatch
As required
2 per pistol
1 per pistol
As required
1 per firer
1 per firer
1 per firer
1 per firer
1 per coach
Complete
As required
0811. Dress. Dress for Pistol LF lessons should include belt order webbing,
including a pistol holster. Combat helmets and Combat Body Armour are to be worn
for all LF lessons.
0812. Weapon and Firing Preparation.
a. Where possible, pistols are to be prepared for firing prior to moving to
the range to ensure they are prepared under ideal conditions and not those
that may be experienced on the range.
b. Check each firer has the issued, serviceable hearing protection and his
shooting record card in his possession.
c. Observation of the fall of shot is obvious at short ranges (10 25
metres). During grouping practices it must be emphasized to firers that they
are to take the correct point of aim (POA) for each shot and avoid aiming off.
0813. Aiming Marks. Where white patches are used the POA is to be bottom
centre of the patch.
0814. Coaching. Infantry Training, Volume II, Skill at Arms,Pistol L131A1 contains
full details of coaching requirements. Some essential points to ensure are:
a. The conducting officer and all coaches on the range must have prior
knowledge of coaching techniques.
b. Where possible a coach should be with each firer. If there are insufficient
coaches the Master Coach system should be used.
8-2
c. All group sizes, Mean Points of Impact (MPI), POAs for all positions
and scores are to be recorded on the firers personal shooting record cards.
d. Coaches are to be in possession of binoculars during snap shooting
practices.
0815. Spotters. When grouping, to enable firers and coaches to gain the maximum benefit from the shots fired, members of the waiting detail should be employed
as spotters, using binoculars, to plot the arrival of each shot. To achieve maximum
value from this type of live firing, it is essential that firers are given every opportunity
to discuss the results of their shooting with their coach.
0816. Firers Goals and Progress. Firers who do not achieve the required Firers
Goals and Progress should be given further coaching before firing again.
0817. Scoring. Scores are to be recorded and announced to the firers at the end
of each practice. Details of the scoring system are shown in each individual lesson.
0818. End of Lesson Procedure. At the end of each LF lesson the following drills
are to be completed once the range has been cleared:
a.
b.
c.
Pack kit.
0822. Dress. Tests are to be carried out wearing belt order webbing with combat
helmet.
Definition of Firers Goals and Progress
0823. Handling, Firers Goals and Progress. Handling Gunners Goals and
Progress achieved in WHTs are defined as:
Pass
Fail
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
8-4
Test No. 1
Safety
Unloaded pistol lying on the ground.
1. Order the firer Take control of the pistol. The firer, without further
direction, is to:
a. Pick up the pistol and carry out full normal safety precautions.
1. Standard:
Pass
Fail
Test No. 2
Stripping, Cleaning and Assembling
Pistol unloaded, cleaning kit box, flannelette and cleaning rags, cleaning rod,
oil.
1. Order the firer to strip the pistol as for daily cleaning. Ask the
following questions:
a. What are the differences to normal daily cleaning when in the following
conditions? (choose any 2 conditions)
(1) Wet conditions.
(2) Dry, sandy or dusty conditions.
(3) Cold and extreme cold conditions.
(4) Hot, wet conditions.
b. What materials are provided for cleaning the pistol?
2. Order the firer to Assemble the pistol and carry out the function test
1. Standard:
Pass 1 to 2 mistakes.
Fail More than 2 mistakes.
2. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Test No. 3
Magazine Filling
Magazine, 17 drill rounds.
The firer will fill the magazine by hand with 17 drill rounds.
Instructors Note: Leave magazine filled with 3 rounds on completion .
No time limit.
Test No. 4
Loading
Pistol, one magazine from test 3. Holster worn by the firer.
Pistol and magazine in the holster. Order Load. Pistols must be secured in
holster at the end of the drill.
Instructors Note: The firer is to load with the magazine containing drill
rounds Leave the pistol loaded for Test 5.
1. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Fail More than
1 mistake.
2. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Test No. 5
Ready Drill Standing Position
Pistol loaded and in the holster (from Test 4), representative targets.
Order Standing Position Ready.
1. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions
should be carried out quickly and correctly.
2. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Fail More than 1 mistake.
3. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Test No. 6
Immediate Action (IA)
Pistol loaded and ready (from Test 5), representative targets.
1. Order Fire Pistol firing alright pistol stops. Firer to carry out the
IA.
2. Firer is to check the magazine is fitted correctly, cock the pistol and
continue firing.
3. Order Stop.
1. The actions tested are those relating to the IA drills only.
2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions
should be carried out quickly and correctly.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Fail More than 1 mistake.
4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
8-5
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
8-6
Test No. 7
Obstruction Drill
Pistol loaded and ready (from Test 6), representative targets.
1. Order Fire Pistol firing alright Pistol stops. Firer to carry out the
IA.Slide NOT fully forward.
2. On examination of body and chamber, order Obstruction.
3. When the firer has attempted to shake out the obstruction, order
Obstruction NOT clear. When the firer has removed the magazine and
attempted to remove the obstruction by hand, order Obstruction clear.
4. Firer is to complete the obstruction drill.
5. Order Stop - Make Safe.
1. The actions tested are those relating to Obstruction Drills only.
2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions
should be carried out quickly and correctly.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Fail More than 1 mistake.
4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Test No. 8
Empty Magazine Drill
Pistol made safe with an empty magazine (from Test 7), representative
targets.
1. Instruct the firer to cock the weapon. With the slide held to the rear, order
Fire Pistol firing alright Pistol stops.
2. Firer is to carry out the IA...Empty Magazine. Firer is to carry out the
drill for an empty magazine.
3. When the firer has completed the drill and continued firing, order Stop.
1. The actions tested are those relating to Empty Magazine Drills only.
2. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions
should be carried out quickly and correctly.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Fail More than 1 mistake.
4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Test No. 9
Unloading
Pistol loaded and ready (from Test 8).
Order Unload. The test is not complete until the firer has secured the
pistol and into the holster and secured the magazine.
1. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Fail More than 1 mistake.
2. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
b.
c.
(4)
(5)
(6)
d. Assemble the pistol. Hand operate the slide several times to ensure
that the action works smoothly.
e.
8-7
f.
b. When in the alert position, never turn round to talk to the safety
supervisor or coach.
c. The drill for drawing pistols, loading, unloading etc, will be strictly
enforced. Keep the pistol pointing towards the target while clearing a
stoppage.
d. The chair for use on the sitting practice is to be positioned facing the
targets. RCOs are responsible for ensuring that chairs are placed in a position
where they will not become unstable and/or sink into the range floor
e. Coaches are to stand so that they are looking over the firers left
shoulder.
f.
No one must stand near the right shoulder of the firer from the moment
Load is given until the order Ease Springs has been actioned.
0832. Confirm by questions and practice.
0833. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate where necessary the range
safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21))
Practice Details
0834. Practice details are as follows:
Practice 1. Grouping (Fired Twice)
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
30 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
b. The bore is easier to clean immediately after firing while the barrel is still
warm. If this is not possible, thoroughly oil the bore to assist later cleaning.
At the appropriate time clean the barrel as taught and, except in sandy
conditions, leave it oiled.
c. With an oily rag, wipe off all fouling from the inside of the slide,
particularly the face of the firing pin hole.
d.
e.
8-9
Ammunition
24 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
8-11
15m Standing
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 11/21.
2. 3 x 3 second exposure.
1. Fire 2 shots with 1 second shot cadence at the left target.
2. Dress forward and discuss the results.
3. Repeat the practice on the right target.
4. Dress forward and discuss the results, record the scores on the
right target only.
10m Standing
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 11/21.
2. 3 x 3 second exposure.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.
5m Standing
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 11/21.
2. 3 x 2 second exposure.
Instructions
3m Standing
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 11/21.
2. 3 x 2 second exposure.
Instructions
Scoring
0856. Two points per hit within the CQM scoring area, one point anywhere else on
the target.
Firers Goals and Progress
HPS 48
Pass 34
End of Lesson Procedure
8-12
15m Standing
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 11/21.
2. 2 x 4 second exposure.
1. Firer in the CQB stance.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire Two shots at the body and two to the head at each engagement.
4. Discuss the fall of shot, record scores and patch up.
8-13
10m Standing
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 11/21.
2. 2 x 4 second exposure.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.
5m Standing
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 11/21.
2. 2 x 3 second exposure.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.
3m Standing
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 11/21.
2. 2 x 3 second exposure.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.
Scoring
0865. Two points per hit in the central scoring CQM area, one point per hit
everywhere else on the target.
Firers Goals and Progress
HPS 64
Pass 45
End of Lesson Procedure
8-14
15m Standing
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 2 x Fig 11/21.
2. 2 x 4 second exposure.
1. On command or appearance of the targets, fire two rounds at each
target.
2. After the second engagement, dress forward and discuss the results.
3. Record the scores.
8-15
Practice 2. Pairs
Range/Positioning
10m Standing
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. 2x Fig 11/21.
2. 2 x 4 second exposure.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.
Practice 3. Pairs
Range/Positioning
5m Standing
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. 2x Fig 11/21.
2. 2 x 4 second exposure.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.
Practice 4. Pairs
Range/Positioning
3m Standing
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. 2x Fig 11/21.
2. 2 x 4 second exposure.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.
Scoring
0874. Two points per hit in the central scoring CQM area, one point per hit anywhere
else on the target.
Firers Goals and Progress
HPS 64.
Pass 45
End of Lesson Procedure
8-16
8-17
Practice 1. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
15 m Sitting (Chair)
3 x Sighters
6 Rounds
1. 2 x Figure 11.
2. 3 x 5 second exposures with intervals of between 510 seconds.
1. Firer in the sitting position. Made Safe with the pistol holstered.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire 2 rounds at the left target in each exposure.
4. Make safe and holster the pistol after each exposure.
5. Record the scores.
Practice 2. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Scoring
1 point per hit.
Firers Goals and Progress
HPS 30
Pass 21
End of Lesson Procedure
8-18
Range/ Target
Timings
Remarks
15 m
2 x Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 11
17 23
31 37
20 m
2 x Figure 11
As for Practice 1
25 m
2 x Figure 11
As for Practice 1
8-19
Practice Details
0891. Practice details are as follows:
Practice 1. Confirm CQB POA
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. At each range, fire 1 well aimed shot at the nominated aiming mark.
2. Establish the POA.
3. Fire a second shot to confirm the POA..
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
2 x Figure 11/21
Instructions
25m Standing
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
2 x Figure 11/21
Instructions
8-21
Pistol ACMT
A. RCO Notes
0892. Firing Requirement. The Pistol ACMT is to be fired annually by all personnel
whose personal or alternate weapon is the Service Pistol.
0893. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 25 minutes to complete all
practices.
0894. Stores.
Normal range stores
1 x Stopwatch
2 x Figure 11/21 per firer
1x Chair per firer
0895. Rules.
a. Dress and equipment for this test is to be combat dress, belt order
including pistol holster, combat helmet, body armour and issued, serviceable
hearing protection.
b.
8-22
Practice Details
08101. Practice details are as follows:
Practice 1. Snap
Range/Positioning
25 m Standing
Ammunition
4 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 2 x Figure 11.
2. 1 x 8 second exposure
1. Firer in the standing alert position, ready, with the safety catch
applied.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire 4 rounds from the standing position at the left target
4. Record the scores.
Practice 2. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 2 x Figure 11.
2. 2 x 5 second exposures with intervals of 5-10 seconds
1. Firer in the standing alert position.
2. Order Watch and shoot.
3. Fire 2 rounds at the left tgt on each exposure.
4. Return to the alert position after each exposure.
5. Repeat the practice kneeling at the right hand tgt.
6. Record the scores.
Practice 3. CQB
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
16 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
8-23
Practice 4. Snap
Range/Positioning
10 m Sitting (Chair)
Ammunition
4 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 2 x Figure 11/21.
2. 2 x 7 second exposures with an interval of 5-10 seconds.
1. Firer in the sitting chair position with the pistol made safe in the
holster.
2. Fire 2 rounds at the left tgt on the first exposure.
3. Make safe and return the pistol to the holster after the first exposure.
4. Fire 2 rds at the right tgt on the second exposure.
5. Order Watch and Shoot.
6. Record the scores.
Scoring
08102. Practice 1 & 2 one points per hit, practice 3 & 4 2 points per hit within the inner
or outer scoring area. One point per hit anywhere else on the target.
Standards
08103. The OMS for each practice is shown in the table below. If a firer fails a practice
they must reshoot that practice only to achieve the OMS. Firers who fail are to have
coaching before re-testing.
Prac
Range
Rounds
1&2
20/25 m
3&4
3-15 M
OMS Requirement
HPS
Pistol User
Mksm
12
10
12
20
28
36
40
8-24
Range/ Target
Timings
Remarks
25 m
2 x Figure 11/21
UP DOWN
05 14
20 m
2 x Figure 11/21
UP DOWN
05 11
17 23
3-15 m
2 x Figure 11/21
UP DOWN
05 09
10 m
2 x Figure 11/21
UP DOWN
05 13
8-25
15 m Standing
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
8-26
1. 2 x Figure 11.
2. 1 x 12 second exposure.
1. Firer in the nominated position, wearing respirator and gloves.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire 6 rounds at the left target.
4. Record the scores.
Practice 2. Snap
Range/Positioning
20 m Kneeling
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 2 x Figure 11.
2. 3 x 7 second exposures with intervals of 4 seconds.
1. Firer in the standing alert position, wearing respirator and gloves.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. The appearance of the target is the signal for the firer to adopt the
nominated position and fire two rounds at the right target.
4. Return to the standing alert position between exposures.
5. Record the scores.
Practice 3. Snap
Range/Positioning
25 m Kneeling
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2 x Figure 11.
3 x 5 second exposures with intervals of 4 seconds.
Firer in the nominated position, wearing respirator and gloves.
Order Watch and Shoot.
Fire one round at each target in each exposure.
Return to the alert position between exposures.
Record the scores.
Scoring
1 point per hit.
Standards
HPS 18
Pass 11
End of Lesson Procedure
8-27
8-28
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
15 m
1 x Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 18
20 m
2 x Figure 11
UP DOWN
05
13
17
25
29
37
25 m
2 x Figure 11
UP DOWN
05
11
15
21
25
31
Remarks
Chapter 9
(Reserved)
9-1
9-2
CHAPTER 10
TRANSITION TO LIVE FIRING TACTICAL TRAINING
Scope
Contents
SCOPE 10-1
1001. Chapter 10 sets out Stage 4 in
COMPLETION OF TLFTT SHOOTS
10-1
the System for Training the Battle Shot
SECTION 1 RIFLE/LSW
10-2
Transition to Live Firing Tactical Training
SECTION 2 LMG
10-50
(TLFTT). The shoots in this Stage are
SECTION 3 SHARPSHOOTER
10-75
central to the successful transition from
SECTION 4 CQM RIFLE/PISTOL
10-96
basic shooting standards achieved in Live
SECTION 5 CQM LMG
10-109
Firing Marksmanship Training (LFMT)
SECTION 6 F&M TEST
10-122
Stages 1 to 3 to the more testing operational
shooting skills required by all Arms and Services
1002. For DCC Roled firers in particular, TLFTT prepares and trains firers for the
LFTT exercises in which they will participate.
Completion of TLFTT Shoots
1003. The following shoots contained in this chapter are available to be fired by All
Arms and Services as directed by the chain of command or PJHQ. The Commanders
Guide at Table 1 within Chapter 1 directs the training to be completed.
10-1
Section 1.
Rifle/LSW
Application of TLFTT Shoots
1004. Firing At The LNV. Firing
at the LNV is to be conducted in
accordance with the Commanders
Guide within Chapter 1. The results of
firing at the LNV - Assessments are to
be recorded on unit computer systems.
1005. Firing with NVD and Thermal
Imaging Sights. NVD/TI Shoots are
to be fired in accordance with the
Commanders Guide within Chapter
1. The results of firing with NVD/TI Assessments are to be recorded on
unit computer systems.
Contents
FIRING AT MOVING TARGETS-INSTRUCTIONAL 10-3
FIRING AT MOVING TARGETS - USING FP COVER 10-7
FIRING AT MOVING TARGETS -ASSESSMENT
10-9
MOVING TARGETS AT LONGER RANGES
10-12
FIRING AT THE LNV
10-14
FIRING WITH NVD/TI ZEROING 10-19
FIRING WITH NVD/TI ASSESSMENT
10-21
FIRING WITH HMNVS AND LA AT 25 METRES
10-25
FIRING WITH HMNVS AND LA AT 100 METRES
10-27
FIRING WITH HMNVS AND LA ASSESSMENT
10-29
AUTOMATIC FIRE
10-32
AUTOMATIC FIRE - ASSESSMENT
10-36
IBSR DEFENSIVE PHASE
10-39
FLANK CONTACTS MOVING VEHICLE
10-41
RIFLE LONG RANGE SUPPRESSION
10-46
1006. Firing At Moving Targets. Firing at Moving Targets shoots are to be fired
in accordance with the Commanders Guide within Chapter 1. The results of Firing at
Moving Targets - Assessments are to be recorded on unit computer systems
Operational Shooting Skills and TLFTT Shoots
1007. Increasingly, sights are issued that include a CQB Sight. This is true of both
LDS and NVD. The planning of the various TLFTT activities should include additional
time and ammunition to allow the firer to practice with the CQB Sight as well as the
main optic.
1008. Operational Shooting Skills and TLFTT Shoots. The details of Operational
Shooting Skills and TLFTT Shoots are contained in the remaining pages of this
chapter. Each practice is contained in separate pages for easy use.
1009. Dress. The dress for the firers is to include belt order webbing, combat
helmets and body armour for all LF lessons. Once completed dress may be altered to
reflect the operational role.
10-2
10-3
Practice 1.
Range/Positioning
50 m Standing Unsupported
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 20 on a screen.
2. 10 x exposures (5 x slow, followed by 5 x fast).
1. Firer in the nominated position.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire one round at each exposure.
4. Discuss the shoot, record the POA.
Practice 2.
Range/Positioning
50 m Kneeling Unsupported
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 20 on a screen.
2. 10 x exposures (5 x slow, followed by 5 x fast).
1. Firer in the nominated position.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire 1 round at each exposure.
4. Discuss the shoot, record the POA.
Practice 3.
Range/Positioning
50 m Standing Unsupported
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 20 on a screen.
2. 10 exposures (5 x slow and 5 x fast) in random order.
1. Firer in the nominated position.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire 2 rounds at each exposure.
4. Discuss the shoot, record the scores.
Practice 4.
Range/Positioning
50 m Kneeling Unsupported
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-4
1. Figure 20 on a screen.
2. 10 exposures at the slow speed.
1. Firer in the standing alert position.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. The appearance of the target is the signal for the firer to adopt the
nominated position, and fire 2 rounds at each exposure.
4. Between exposures order Adopt the standing alert position.
5. Discuss the shoot, record the scores.
Practice 5.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 20 on a screen.
2. 10 x exposures (5 x slow, followed by 5 x fast).
1. Firer in the nominated position.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire 1 round at each exposure.
4. Discuss the shoot, record the POA.
Practice 6.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 20 on a screen.
2. 10 x exposures (5 x slow, followed by 5 x fast).
1. Firer in the nominated position.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire 1 round at each exposure.
4. Discuss the shoot, record the POA.
Practice 7.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Figure 20 on a screen.
10 exposures (5 x slow and 5 x fast) in random order.
Firer in the nominated position.
Order Watch and Shoot.
Fire 2 rounds at each exposure.
Discuss the shoot, record the scores.
Practice 8.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 20 on a screen.
2. 10 exposures at the slow speed.
1. Firer in the standing alert position.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. The appearance of the target is the signal for the firer to adopt the
nominated position, and fire 2 rounds at each exposure.
4. Between exposures order Adopt the standing alert position.
5. Discuss the shoot, record the scores.
10-5
Scoring
Practices 3, 4, 7 and 8 1 point per hit on the target.
Firers Goals and Progress
HPS 80
Pass 52
End of Lesson Procedure
10-6
c. Each firer will start from the left hand piece of cover in each respective
lane and move tactically to alternate pieces of cover as the shoot progresses.
d.
10-7
Practice - Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
24 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 20 on a screen.
2. 6 double exposures (3 x slow and 3 x fast) in random order.
3. An initial exposure of the targets will initiate the contact.
4. Targets are only exposed once firers are in position and the RCO
has signalled to the target operator for the next double- exposure.
1. Firer is loaded and made ready in the standing alert position; 5m to
the rear of the left piece of cover.
2. Order Watch Out.
3. On appearance of the targets, the firer is to double forward and take
cover.
4. The firer will then receive 2 exposures of the Fig 20 target where he
is to fire 2 Rounds at the target for each exposure.
5. After the second exposure the firer is to apply his safety catch and
move to the next piece of cover.
6. On completion of the last exposure the firer is to apply his safety
catch and await further orders.
Scoring
1 point per hit on the target.
Firers Goals and Progress
HPS 24
Pass 15
End of Range Procedure
10-8
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 20 on a screen.
2. 8 x exposures in the following order: 2 x slow, 2 x fast, 2 x slow,
2 x fast.
1. Firer in the standing unsupported position.
2. Fire 1 round at each of the first 4 exposures then adopt the kneeling
unsupported position and fire 1 round at each of the remaining
exposures.
3. Each shot hole is to be indicated by a spotting disc.
4. Discuss the shoot.
10-9
Practice 1.
Range/Positioning
50 m Standing Unsupported
Ammunition
16 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 20 on a screen.
2. 8 x exposures (4 x slow and 4 x fast) in random order.
1. Firer in the nominated position.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire 2 Rounds at each exposure.
4. Record the scores.
Practice 2.
Range/Positioning
50 m Kneeling Unsupported
Ammunition
16 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-10
1. Figure 20 on a screen.
2. 8 x exposures at the slow speed.
1. Firer in the standing alert position.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. The appearance of the target is the signal for the firer to adopt the
nominated position and fire 2 Rounds at each exposure.
4. Between exposures order Adopt the standing alert position.
5. Record the scores.
Scoring
1034. 1 point per hit on the target.
Standards
HPS 64
Pass 42
End of Range Procedure
10-11
200m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
WALKING
5 left and 5 right runs of a fig 20 target.
1. At each exposure fire 1 round.
2. Discuss results.
200m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
RUNNING
5 left and 5 right runs of a fig 20 target.
Instructions
As above.
10-12
10-14
b.
c. Correctly position the butt in the shoulder and the cheek on the cheek
piece with the rifle angled down below the target.
d. Whilst initially observing the target with both eyes and looking over the
top of the rear sight, start to raise the weapon until the TRILUX source is
observed in the bottom of the field of view.
e. Continue to raise the weapon until the TRILUX source appears just
below the POA and the rear aperture is presented in front of the right eye.
f.
As the TRILUX source is about to coincide with the POA, close the left
eye.
g.
Ensure the range drum is set at the 300 metre range position (SUSAT).
b. Look through the sight and adjust the brightness until the tip of the
pointer/crosshair is adequately illuminated.
c.
Practice 1. Sighting
Range/Positioning
LNV Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 2. Snap
Range/Positioning
LNV Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4. Rapid
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-16
LNV Prone
5 Rounds
1. Figure 11 stick- in (draped).
2. 1 x 15 second exposure.
1. Firer in the standing alert position.
2. Order Watch, Listen Out.
3. At the start of the exposure the firer is to adopt the prone position and
fire five rounds rapid at the exposure.
4. Record the scores.
5. Targets up and hold.
Practice 5. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 6. Rapid
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
LNV Prone
5 Rounds
1. Figure 11 stick- in (draped).
2. 1 x 12 second exposure.
1. Firer in the standing alert position.
2. Order Watch, Listen Out.
3. The appearance of the target is the signal for the firer to adopt the
prone position and fire five rounds rapid at the exposure.
4. Targets up and hold.
Scoring
1056. One point per hit.
Firers Goals and Progress
1057. Assessment Practices 4, 5 and 6..
HPS 15
Pass 10
End of Lesson Procedure
10-17
Time Chart
1058. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery
ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be
allowed.
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
LNV Figure 11
stick-in (draped)
No time limit
LNV Figure 11
stick-in (draped)
UP DOWN
05 11
19 25
30 36
45 51
58 1:04
Up and hold.
(ETR only targets fall when hit)
LNV Figure 11
stick-in (draped)
As for Practice 2
Up and hold.
(ETR only targets fall when hit)
LNV Figure 11
stick-in (draped)
UP DOWN
05 21
Up and hold.
LNV Figure 11
stick-in (draped)
UP DOWN
05 10
15 20
26 31
37 42
48 53
Up and hold.
(ETR only targets fall when hit)
LNV Figure 11
stick-in (draped)
UP DOWN
05 18
Up and hold.
10-18
Remarks
Up and hold.
c.
10-19
Practice Details
1066. Practice details are as follows:
Practice 1. Grouping
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-20
b.
10-21
Practice 1. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 1 x Figure 11.
2. 5 x 5 second exposures with irregular intervals.
1. Firer in the nominated position.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire one round at each exposure.
4. Targets fall when hit.
Practice 2. Rapid
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4. Rapid
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-22
1. 1 x Figure 11.
2. 1 x 20 second exposure.
1. Firer in the nominated position.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire 10 Rounds rapid.
4. Targets up and hold.
Practice 5. Deliberate
Range/Positioning 300 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
1. 1 x Figure 11.
Target/ Exposure
2. 10 x 6 second exposures with irregular intervals.
1. Firer in the nominated position.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
Instructions
3. Fire one round at each exposure.
4. Targets fall when hit.
5. Record the scores.
Scoring
1076. One point per hit.
Standards
HPS 40
Pass 24
End of Lesson Procedure
10-23
Time Chart
1077. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery
ranges this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be allowed.
10-24
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
100 m
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 11
18 24
28 34
39 45
50 56
Remarks
100 m
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 26
Up and hold.
200 m
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 12
19 26
30 37
43 50
55 1:02
200 m
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 26
Up and hold.
300 m
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 12
19 26
30 37
43 50
55 1:02
1:08 1:15
1:20 1:27
1:31 1:38
1:43 1:50
1:55 2:02
10-25
Practice 1. Grouping (Fired twice first with red dot, then with IR laser)
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
2 x 15 Round magazines
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fire a five round group from sitting, kneeling and standing positions.
2. Discuss the groups and record the group sizes.
3. Repeat the practice using IR laser.
75 mm
Kneeling
80 mm
Standing
140 mm
10-26
10-27
Practice Details
1095. The practice details are as follows:
Practice 1. Check groups
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
1 x 20 Round magazine
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Ammunition
1 x 10 Round magazine
Target/ Exposure
As for Practice 1
Instructions
Fire a five round group in each firing position with each laser to
determine POA.
10-28
10-29
Ammunition
10 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
2. 2 x 20 second exposures with an interval to allow firers to adopt the
patrol position.
1. Firer in the Standing Alert position with the HMNVS and LA On and
focused at 100 metres.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. On the appearance of the target the firer is to fire one round from
the standing position then adopt the kneeling position and fire a further
four rounds at the exposure.
4. Firers must adopt the Standing Alert position between exposures.
5. Target up and hold.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 2. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
5 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
2. 5 x 6 second exposures with irregular intervals.
1. Firer in the nominated position with the HMNVS and LA On and
focused at 100 metres.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire one round at each exposure.
4. Targets fall when hit.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3. Snap
Range/Positioning
100 m Kneeling
Ammunition
5 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
2. 5 x 8 second exposures with irregular intervals.
1. Firer in the nominated position with the HMNVS and LA On and
focused at 100 metres.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire one round at each exposure.
4. Targets fall when hit.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4. Snap
Range/Positioning
50 m Standing Unsupported
Ammunition
5 Rounds
1. Figure 12.
2. 5 x 6 second exposures.
1. Firer in the nominated position.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire one round at each exposure.
4. Targets fall when hit.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-30
Scoring
10105. Scores are to be recorded and announced on conclusion of each practice.
Practices 1 to 4
Standard
HPS 25
Pass 17
End of Lesson Procedure
Time Chart
10106. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery
ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be
allowed.
Practice
Range/Target
100 m
Figure 11
Up Down
05 26
Timings
Remarks
100 m
Figure 11
Up Down
05 12
18 25
29 36
41 48
51 58
100 m
Figure 11
Up Down
05 14
19 28
32 41
45 54
1:01 1:10
50 m
Figure 12
Up Down
05 12
17 24
30 37
40 47
54 1:01
10-31
25 m Kneeling Unsupported
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 2.
Range/Positioning
25 m Standing Unsupported
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
Practice 3.
Range/Positioning
25 m Kneeling Unsupported
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-33
Practice 4.
Range/Positioning
50 m Kneeling Unsupported
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
Practice 5.
Range/Positioning
50 m Standing Unsupported
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
Practice 6.
Range/Positioning
50 m Kneeling Unsupported
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 7.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
30 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-34
Scoring
10115. Practices 3, 6 and 7
10-35
10122. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range
safety rules applicable (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)).
Practice Details
10123. Practice details are as follows:
Practice 1.
Range/Positioning
25m Standing
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 2.
Range/Positioning
25m Kneeling
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3.
Range/Positioning
25m Standing
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4.
Range/Positioning
25m Kneeling
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
10-37
Instructions
Scoring
10124. One point per hit in Practices 3 and 4.
Standards
HPS 30
Pass 21
End of Lesson Procedure
Time Chart
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
25m
Double Figure 11 (Stick in)
No time limit.
1. Up and Hold
Remarks
25m
Double Figure 11 (Stick in)
No time limit.
1. Up and Hold
25m
Double Figure 11 (Stick in)
UP DOWN
05
10
1. Up and Hold
2. Reset watch and repeat
four times.
3. Record the scores.
25m
Double Figure 11 (Stick in)
UP DOWN
05
10
1. Up and Hold
2. Reset watch and repeat
four times.
3. Record the scores.
Tgt *
Tgt Tgt Tgt Tgt Tgt Tgt Tgt Tgt Tgt
25 m
- - - - - - - - ** **
Notes:
* Targets are to be spaced at least 5 metres apart.
** White mine tape should be used to mark the main firing points at 25 m and 50 m.
10-38
c. Each firer will start from the left hand piece of cover in each respective
lane and move tactically to alternate pieces of cover as the shoot progresses.
d.
10-39
Practice 1. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
16 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 11 or 12
2. 1 x 1 second flash exposure followed by 2 x 4 second exposures at
irregular intervals from each piece of cover.
3. Fig 11 and Fig 12 targets are to be randomly exposed as per the
RCOs instructions.
4. There will be a total of 8 double exposures and the RCO is to
ensure that the exposures are split equally between Fig 11 and Fig 12
targets.
4. Targets are only exposed once firers are in position and the RCO
has signalled for the tar- gets to be raised.
1. Firer is loaded and made ready in the standing alert position; 5 m to
the rear of the left piece of cover.
2. Order Watch Out.
3. On appearance of the flash exposure the firer is to double forward
and take cover.
4. The firer will then receive 2 exposures of a Fig 11 or Fig 12 for 4
seconds each at each piece of cover.
5. The firer is to fire one round at each exposure.
6. Targets fall when hit.
7. After the second exposure the firer is to apply his safety catch and
move to the next piece of cover.
8. On completion of the last exposure the firer is to apply his safety
catch and await further orders.
Scoring
10133. 1 point per hit on the target.
Firers Goals and Progress
HPS 16
Pass 10
End of Lesson Procedure
Time Chart
10134. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain ranges,
this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be allowed.
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
Remarks
Snap
100 m
Figure 12
UP DOWN
05 06
17 22
28 33
10-40
b. Rough Track. Rough surface but without chamfers, pot holes or divots
building up to a speed of 25 kph.
c. Rough Ground. Track or ground with chamfers, pot holes and divots
building up to a speed of 10 kph.
10137. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 60 minutes to complete all
practices.
10138. Time Chart. A time chart is included after the practice details.
10139. Stores.
Normal range stores
Stick in Single Fig 11
Stick in Double Fig 11
Stick in Triple Fig 11
Electric Targets/Pull up Single Fig 11
Electric Targets/Pull up Double Fig 11
Electric Targets/Pull up Triple Fig 11
Paste pot & patches
Whistle
Mine Tape
60 x 5.56 mm Rounds Ball ammunition
Vehicle
Goggles
As required
As required
As required
As required
As required
As required
As required
As required
As required
per firer
As required
1 per firer
10-41
10140. Miscellaneous.
a. Only one firer and one safety supervisor is permitted per vehicle. If
the LSW is to be used the bipod legs must be folded away the weapon is
to be used in the same manner as the rifle. Firing can only take place over
the side of the vehicle providing the target being engaged is within the arcs
allocated for the range. Under no circumstances is firing to be conducted
over the front or the rear or the vehicle (see diagram below for a detailed
explanation).
10-42
f.
(2) Rough track (rough surface but without chamfers, pot holes or
divots) building up to a maximum of 25 kph.
(3) Rough ground (track or ground with chamfers, pot holes and
divots) building up to a maximum of 10 kph.
g. The appropriate WDA template is to be applied. The SA safety angle
must be increased by adding the appropriate C of F shown in Ref A. The RCO
is to check the condition of the ground on the day of firing.
h. Firing from a moving vehicle platform is only to be conducted when
firers have successfully completed the static vehicle practices. Additionally,
firers are to complete practices on a smooth track before progressing to a
rough track and then on to rough ground.
i.
Safety supervisors are to be positioned in such a way that they can
physically and swiftly intervene. Depending on the vehicle type, this may be
on the vehicle, on the ground, or in a vehicle following close by. Whatever
the circumstances, communications must be maintained between the RCO,
supervisor, vehicle crew, and firer at all times.
10-43
Practice Details
10143. All Practices are to be fired from the standing position with the bipod folded,
practice details are as follows:
Practice 1.
Range/Positioning
100m
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 2.
Range/Positioning
200m
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3.
Range/Positioning
300m
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4.
Range/Positioning
100m
Ammunition
9 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-44
1. 3 x Figure 11.
2. Slow moving (see note)
1. Firers in the standing position (See miscellaneous paragraph).
2. Vehicle is to move along the track at the required speed.
3. Firer to fire 1 burst of 2-3 Rounds at each target.
4. Target up and hold.
Note: To be conducted from a slow moving vehicle travelling at 10 kph then a fast
moving vehicle travelling at 25 kph.
Scoring
10144. One point per hit on target.
Standards
10145. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS at each
firing distance and at both speeds. Failure to achieve the OMS at any firing distance
will constitute a fail of the live firing lesson, however, only the practices at the firing
distances where the OMS was not achieved need to be fired again. Firers who fail
are to undergo further practice, with coaching for the areas of weakness, before retesting.
Ser
Vehicle
Total
Range
Speed
Rounds
100m
2
3
10 kph
OMS Requirement
Score
HPS
15
No of
Engagements
3
15
200m
15
15
300m
15
15
100m
100m
15
15
200m
15
15
300m
15
15
100m
6
7
8
25 kph
10146. The vehicle is permitted to face any direction and firing may take place from
any side of the vehicle, however, all targets being engaged are to be contained within
the arc of fire for that range.
10147. If the range does not have a track or road for the vehicle to drive along then
you are to mark the route for the vehicle using pegs and mine tape or a suitable
method. This will ensure that drivers move along the same route and will assist with
control to ensure that fire is contained within the arc of fire for that range. RCOs are to
liaise with range control with regards to the vehicle route on the range.
End of Lesson Procedure
10-45
400 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-46
Practice 2. Snap
Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
500 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4. Snap
Range/Positioning
500 m Prone
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
600 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-47
Practice 6. Snap
Range/Positioning
600 m Prone
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Standards
10157. The OMS for each practice or group of practices shown in the table below is
a guide to progress.
Ser
Range
Total
Rounds
OMS Requirement
400 m
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
6
500 m
600 m
10-48
Score
Range/Target
Timings
400 m
Double Figure 11
500 m
Double Figure 11
600 m
Double Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 1
20 27
35 42
50 57
1.03
1.10
1.17 1.24
UP DOWN
05 12
20 27
35 42
50 57
1.03
1.10
1.17 1.24
UP DOWN
05 12
20 27
35 42
50 57
1.03
1.10
1.17 1.24
Remarks
Fall when hit.
10-49
Section 2.
Light Machine Gun
Application of TLFTT Shoots
10158. Firing At The LNV. Firing at the
LNV is to be conducted prior to TLFTT/
LFTT if the training during these stages
of training the battle shot involve night
shooting and as pre-operational training
for all combat infantrymen serving in a
regular and Reserve battalion. The results
of Firing at the LNV - Assessments are to
be recorded on unit computer systems.
Contents
ENGAGING MOVING TARGETS
MOVING TARGETS AT LONGER RANGES
FIRING AT THE LIMIT OF NIGHT VISIBILITY
FIRING WITH NVD/TI ZEROING
FIRING WITH NVD/TI ASSESSMENT
VEHICLE MOUNTED SHOOTS
STATIC VEHICLE SHOOT
VEHICLE MOUNTED SHOOTS
MOVING VEHICLE SHOOT
10-51
10-53
10-56
10-59
10-61
10-64
10-70
10159. Firing with NVD/TI. NVD/TI Shoots are to be fired prior to TLFTT/LFTT (if
NVD is to be used) and as pre-operational training for all combat infantrymen serving
in a regular and reserve battalion. The results of Firing with NVD/TI - Assessments are
to be recorded on unit computer systems.
10160. Firing At Moving Targets. Firing at Moving Targets shoots are to be fired
Within 12 months prior to any LFTT exercise where the firer would be firing at moving
targets. The results of Firing at Moving Targets - Assessments are to be recorded on
the unit computer systems:
Operational Shooting Skills and TLFTT Shoots
10161. Operational Shooting Skills and TLFTT Shoots. The details of Operational
Shooting Skills and TLFTT Shoots are contained in the remaining pages of this
chapter. Each practice is contained in separate pages for easy use.
10162. Dress. The dress is to include belt order webbing, Combat helmets and Body
Armour, to be worn for all LF lessons. The dress for the firers is to include belt order
webbing, combat helmets and body armour for all LF lessons. Once completed dress
may be altered to reflect the operational role.
10-50
10-51
50 m Prone
Ammunition
50 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 20 on a screen.
2. 10 x exposures in the following order:
5 x slow.
5 x fast.
1. Firer in the prone position.
2. Fire 1 burst of 3-5 Rounds at each of the exposures.
3. The MPI of each burst is to be indicated using the SARTS tablet or
with a spotting disc.
4. Discuss the practice.
Practice 2.
Range/Positioning
50 m Prone
Ammunition
50 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 20 on a screen.
2. 10 x exposures (5 x slow and 5 x fast) in random order.
1. Firer in the prone position.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire 1 burst of 3-5 Rounds at each exposure.
4. Targets fall when hit.
5. Record the scores.
Scoring
10172. (Practice 2 only) 1 point per successful engagement.
Standards
HPS 10
Pass 6 (60%)
End of Range Procedure
10-52
200m Prone
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
WALKING
5 left and 5 right runs of a fig 20 target.
Instructions
As above.
10-53
200m Prone
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
RUNNING
5 left and 5 right runs of a fig 20 target.
Instructions
As above.
300m Prone
Ammunition
10 rds or a belt of 50
Target/ Exposure
WALKING
5 left and 5 right runs of a fig 20 target.
Instructions
As above.
300m Prone
Ammunition
10 rds or a belt of 50
Target/ Exposure
RUNNING
5 left and 5 right runs of a fig 20 target.
Instructions
As above.
Practice 5. Identify and apply points of aim for a moving target. Incorporating fresh wind.
Range/Positioning
200m Prone
Ammunition
10 rds or a belt of 50
Target/ Exposure
WALKING
5 left and 5 right runs of a fig 20 target.
Instructions
As above.
Practice 6. Identify and apply points of aim for a moving target. Incorporating wind.
Range/Positioning
200m Prone
Ammunition
10 rds or a belt of 50
Target/ Exposure
RUNNING
5 left and 5 right runs of a fig 20 target.
Instructions
As above.
10-54
Practice 7. Identify and apply points of aim for a moving target. Incorporating wind.
Range/Positioning
300m Prone
Ammunition
10 rds or a belt of 50
Target/ Exposure
WALKING
5 left and 5 right runs of a fig 20 target.
Instructions
As above.
Practice 8. Identify and apply points of aim for a moving target. Incorporating wind.
Range/Positioning
300m Prone
Ammunition
10 rds or a belt of 50
Target/ Exposure
RUNNING
5 left and 5 right runs of a fig 20 target.
Instructions
As above.
10-55
LNV Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11
Instructions
10-56
Practice 2.
Range/Positioning
LNV Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 11.
2. 1 x 60 second exposure.
1. Firer in the nominated position.
2. Order Watch, Listen and Shoot.
3. Fire 20 rounds in bursts of 3-5 rounds.
4. Targets up and hold.
Practice 3.
Range/Positioning
LNV Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 11.
2. 4 x 6 second exposures with irregular intervals.
1. Firer in the nominated position.
2. Order Watch, Listen and Shoot.
3. Fire one burst of 3-5 rounds at each exposure.
4. Targets fall when hit.
Practice 4.
Range/Positioning
LNV Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 11.
2. 1 x 60 second exposure.
1. Firer in the nominated position
2. Order Watch, Listen and Shoot.
3. Fire 20 rounds in bursts of 3-5 Rounds.
4. Targets up and hold.
Practice 5.
Range/Positioning
LNV Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 11.
2. 4 x 5 second exposures with irregular intervals.
1. Firer in the nominated position.
2. Order Watch, Listen and Shoot.
3. Fire one burst of 3-5 Rounds at each exposure.
4. Targets fall when hit.
10-57
Scoring
10191. The sighting practice is not scored.
Practices 2 and 4
Practices 3 and 5
Time Chart
10193. One extra second has been included for target movement.
10-58
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
Remarks
LNV Figure 11
No time limit
Up and hold.
LNV Figure 11
Up and hold.
LNV Figure 11
4
5
LNV Figure 11
LNV Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 1:06
UP DOWN
05 12
16 23
28 35
41 48
As for Practice 2
UP DOWN
05 11
14 20
25 31
36 42
Up and hold.
Fall when hit.
10-59
Practice Details
10201. The practice details are as follows:
Practice 1. Grouping
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-60
10-61
Practice 1. Sighting
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11
Instructions
Practice 2. Timed
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 11.
2. 1 x 45 second exposure.
1. Firer in the nominated position.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire 20 rounds in burst of 3-5 Rounds.
4. Targets up and hold.
Practice 3. Timed
Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
35 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Scoring
10212. One point per hit in Practices 2 and 3.
Standard
HPS 55
Pass 27
End of Lesson Procedure
10-62
TIME CHART
10213. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery
ranges this will be insufficient, therefore, additional time for target movement is to be
allowed.
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
100 m
Figure 11
100 m
Figure 11
Up Down
05 51
Up and hold.
200 m
Double Figure 11
Up Down
05 09
25 29
51 55
1:10 1:14
1:19 1:23
1:42 1:46
1:56 2:00
Up and hold.
No time limit
Remarks
Up and hold.
10-63
As required
As required
As required.
As required
As required
As required
As required
As Required
Per firer
As required
1 per firer
10219. Vehicles. This practice can be conducted from all permissible vehicle
platforms. Firing is not permitted over the front or the rear of the vehicle. RCOs are
to ensure that they read and understand the rules contained in Reference A prior to
conducting this shoot.
10220. Miscellaneous.
a. Only one firer and one safety supervisor is permitted per vehicle. Below
is a diagram of a suggest layout of the range.
b. RCOs are to liaise with Range Control over the most suitable range on
which to achieve the aim of the lesson.
10-64
100m (Static)
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a screen.
Instructions
Practice 2.
Range/Positioning
100m (Static)
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 1 x Figure 11.
2. 1 x 45 second exposure.
1. Firers in the standing position (See miscellaneous paragraph).
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire 20 rounds in bursts of 3-5 rounds.
4. Targets up and hold.
Practice 3.
Range/Positioning
100m (Static)
Ammunition
30 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 2 x Figure 11.
2. 2 x 30 second exposure (one exposure of each target).
1. Firers in the standing position (See miscellaneous paragraph).
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire 20 rounds in bursts of 3-5 rounds.
4. Targets up and hold.
10-65
Practice 4.
Range/Positioning
200m (Static)
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 5.
Range/Positioning
200m (Static)
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 6.
Range/Positioning
200m (Static)
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 7.
Range/Positioning
300m (Static)
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-66
Practice 8.
Range/Positioning
300m (Static)
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 9.
Range/Positioning
300m (Static)
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Scoring
10224. Practices 1, 4 and 7 are not scored.
10225. Practices 2, 3, 5, 6, 8 and 9 1 Point per hit on the figure targets
Standards
10226. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS at each
firing distance in practices 2, 3, 5, 6, 8 and 9. Failure to achieve the OMS at any firing
distance will constitute a fail of the live firing lesson, however, only the practices at the
firing distances where the OMS was not achieved needs to be fired again. Firers who
fail are to undergo further practice, with coaching for the areas of weakness, before
re-testing.
Ser
Range
Total
Rounds
100m
2
3
OMS Requirement
No of
Engagements
Score
HPS
40
28
40
200m
40
28
40
300m
40
28
40
Time Chart
10227. One extra second has been included for target movement if using electric
targets. If using stick in targets then a whistle is to be used to control the exposures.
A test of the target mechanism should be conducted to ensure that one second is
sufficient time to allow for the movement of the target.
Practice
Range/ Target
Timings
100m
Figure 11 on
screen
100m Figure 11
Up Down
05 51
100m Figure 11
Up Down
Tgt 1
05
Tgt 2
41
200m Double
Figure 11 on
screen
200m Double
Figure 11
Up Down
05 12
20 27
30 37
40 47
200m Double
Figure 11
Up Down
Tgt 1&2 05
300m Double
Figure 11
Up Down
05 12
21 27
30 37
40 47
300m Double
Figure 11
Up Down
Tgt 1&2 05
10-68
Remarks
No time limit
1. Up and hold.
2. MPI of the 10 Rounds to be
identified (up to 3 burst)
Up and hold.
36
1:02
No time limit
Up and hold.
1. Up and hold.
2. MPI of the 10 Rounds to be
identified (up to 3 burst)
Up and hold.
1:06
No time limit.
Up and hold.
1. Up and hold.
2. MPI of the 10 Rounds to be
identified (up to 3 burst)
Up and hold.
1:06
Up and hold.
10-69
b. Rough Track. Rough surface but without chamfers, pot holes or divots
building up to a speed of 25 kph.
c. Rough Ground. Track or ground with chamfers, pot holes and divots
building up to a speed of 10 kph.
10232. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all
practices.
10233. Time Chart. A time chart is included after the practice details.
10234. Stores.
Normal range stores
Stick in Single Fig 11
Stick in Double Fig 11
Stick in Triple Fig 11
Electric Targets/Pull up Single Fig 11
Electric Targets/Pull up Double Fig 11
Electric Targets/Pull up Triple Fig 11
Paste pot & patches
Whistle
Mine Tape
90 x 5.56 mm Rounds Ball/4 B1t Belted
Red and white poles
Vehicle
Goggles
10-70
As required
As required
As required
As required
As required
As required
As required
As required
As Required
Per firer
As required
As required
1 per firer
10235. Miscellaneous. Only one firer and one safety supervisor is permitted per
vehicle.
a. Red and white poles need to be positioned at the extremities of the
triangulation limits, this is essential to ensure that all fire remains within the
arcs of fire allocated for the range.
b. Below is a diagram of the suggested layout of the range, the lay- out will
vary depending on the range complex, however, the ranges to and the target
exposures in the table that follows are to be adhered to.
10-71
f.
(2) Rough track (rough surface but without chamfers, pot holes or
divots) building up to a maximum of 25 kph.
(3) Rough ground (track or ground with chamfers, pot holes and
divots) building up to a maximum of 10 kph.
g. The appropriate WDA template is to be applied. The SA safety angle
must be increased by adding the appropriate C of F shown in Ref A. The RCO
is to check the condition of the ground on the day of firing.
h. Firing from a moving vehicle platform is only to be conducted when
firers have successfully completed the static vehicle practices. Additionally,
firers are to complete practices on a smooth track before progressing to a
rough track and then on to rough ground.
i.
Safety supervisors are to be positioned in such a way that they can
physically and swiftly intervene. Depending on the vehicle type, this may be
on the vehicle, on the ground, or in a vehicle following close by. Whatever
the circumstances, communications must be maintained between the RCO,
supervisor, vehicle crew, and firer at all times.
10-72
Practice Details
10238. All Practices are to be fired from the standing position with the bipod down
resting on the cab of the vehicle, practice details are as follows:
Practice 1.
Range/Positioning
100m
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 2.
Range/Positioning
200m
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3.
Range/Positioning
300m
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Note: The shoot is to be conducted from a slow moving vehicle travelling at 10 kph,
after the firer has been debriefed it is then to be conducted from a fast moving vehicle
travelling at 25 kph.
Scoring
10239. One point per hit on target.
10-73
Standards
10240. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS at each
firing distance and at both speeds. Failure to achieve the OMS at any firing distance
will constitute a fail of the live firing lesson, however, only the practices at the firing
distances where the OMS was not achieved needs to be fired again. Firers who fail
are to undergo further practice, with coaching for the areas of weakness, before retesting.
Range
Total
Rounds
100m
15
OMS Requirement
No of
Engagements
3
200m
15
300m
15
100m
15
200m
300m
Ser
1
2
5
6
Vehicle
Speed
10 kph
25 kph
Score
HPS
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
10241. A number of methods are available for the collation of scores, if using
electronic targets then the score can be retrieved from the target box, another method
is to glue paper figure 11 targets to the rear of the target.
End of Lesson Procedure
10242. The vehicle is permitted to face any direction and firing may take place from
any side of the vehicle, however, all targets being engaged are to be contained with- in
the arc of fire for that range.
10243. If the range does not have a track or road for the vehicle to drive along then
you are to mark the route for the vehicle using pegs and mine tape or a suitable
method. This will ensure that drivers move along the same route and will assist with
control to ensure that fire is contained within the arc of fire for that range. RCOs are to
liaise with range control with regards vehicle on the range.
10-74
Section 3
Sharpshooter Rifle L129A1
Application of TLFTT Shoots
10244. Firing At The LNV. Firing at the
LNV is to be conducted prior to TLFTT/
LFTT if the training during these stages
of training the battle shot involve night
shooting and as pre-operational training
for all combat infantrymen serving
in a regular and Reserve battalion.
The results of Firing at the LNV Assessments are to be recorded on unit
computer systems.
Contents
ADVANCED APPLICATION OF FIRE
700 800 METRES
FIRING AT MOVING TARGETS ASSESSMENT
FIRING AT THE LIMIT OF NIGHT VISIBILITY
FIRING WITH MUNS ASSESSMENT
FIRING WITH HMNVS AND LA
INTRODUCTORY SHOOT AT 25 METRES
FIRING WITH HMNVS AND LA AT 100 METRES
FIRING WITH HMNVS AND LA ASSESSMENT
10-76
10-79
10-82
10-86
10-89
10-91
10-93
10245. Firing with NVD/TI. NVD/TI Shoots are to be fired prior to TLFTT/LFTT (if
NVD is to be used) and as pre-operational training for all combat infantrymen serving
in a regular and reserve battalion. The results of Firing with NVD/TI - Assessments are
to be recorded on unit computer systems.
10246. Firing At Moving Targets. Firing at Moving Targets shoots are to be fired
Within 12 months prior to any LFTT exercise where the firer would be firing at moving
targets. The results of Firing at Moving Targets - Assessments are to be recorded on
the unit computer systems.
Operational Shooting Skills and TLFTT Shoots
10247. Operational Shooting Skills and TLFTT Shoots. The details of Opera
tional Shooting Skills and TLFTT Shoots are contained in the remaining pages of this
chapter. Each practice is contained in separate pages for easy use.
10248. Dress. The dress is to include belt order webbing, Combat helmets and Body
Armour, to be worn for all LF lessons. The dress for the firers is to include belt order
webbing, combat helmets and body armour for all LF lessons. Once completed dress
may be altered to reflect the operational role.
10-75
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-76
Practice 2. Snap
Range/Positioning
700 m Prone
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3. Snap
Range/Positioning
800 m Prone
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Scoring
10257. One point per hit.
Standard
10258. The OMS for each practice or group of practices shown in the table below is
a guide to progress.
Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
OMS Requirement
HPS
700 m
15
12
15
800 m
15
12
15
10-77
Time Chart
10259. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain
gallery ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is
to be allowed.
10-78
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
700 m Triple
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05
16
26
37
47
58
1:08
1:19
1:29
1:40
800 m Triple
Figure 11
As for Practice 2.
Remarks
Up and Hold
Up and Hold
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 2 x Figure 20.
2. 8 x exposures in the following order:
2 x slow,
2 x fast,
2 x slow,
2 x fast.
1. Firer in the standing unsupported position.
2. Fire 1 round at each of the first 4 exposures then adopt the
kneeling unsupported position and fire 1 round at each of the
remaining exposures.
3. Each shot hole is to be indicated by a spotting disc.
4. Discuss the shoot.
10-79
Practice 1.
Range/Positioning
50 m Standing Unsupported
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2 x Figure 20.
6 x exposures (3 x slow and 3 x fast) in random order.
Firer in the nominated position.
Order Watch and Shoot.
Fire 2 rounds at each exposure.
Record the scores.
Practice 2.
Range/Positioning
50 m Kneeling Unsupported
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 20.
2. 6 x exposures at the slow speed.
1. Firer in the standing alert position.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. The appearance of the target is the signal for the firer to adopt the
nominated position and fire 2 rounds at each exposure.
4. Between exposures order Adopt the standing alert position.
5. Record the scores.
Practice 3.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2 x Figure 20.
6 x exposures (3 x slow and 3 x fast) in random order.
Firer in the nominated position.
Order Watch and Shoot.
Fire 2 rounds at each exposure.
Record the scores.
Practice 4.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-80
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2 x Figure 20.
6 x exposures (3 x slow and 3 x fast) in random order.
Firer in the nominated position.
Order Watch and Shoot.
Fire 2 rounds at each exposure.
Record the scores.
Scoring
10268. 1 point per hit on the target.
Standard
HPS 48
Pass 38
End of Range Procedure
10-81
10-82
b. Correctly position the butt in the shoulder and the cheek on the cheek
piece with the rifle angled down below the target.
c. Whilst initially observing the target with both eyes and looking over
the top of the rear sight, start to raise the weapon until the light source is
observed in the bottom of the field of view.
d. Continue to raise the weapon until the light source appears just below
the POA and the sight aperture is presented in front of the right eye.
e.
10-83
Practice 1. Sighting
Range/Positioning
LNV Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 2. Snap
Range/Positioning
LNV Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4. Rapid
Range/Positioning
LNV Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-84
Standards
10282. Instructional Practices 2, 3 and 4.
HPS 15
Pass 11
10283. Assessment Practices 5 and 6. To achieve the required standard the firer
must achieve the OMS (see table below). Firers who fail are to undergo further
practice, with coaching for the areas of weakness, before re-testing.
Ser
Range
Total
Rounds
LNV
10
OMS Requirement
Score
7
HPS
10
Time Chart
10284. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain
gallery ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is
to be allowed.
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
LNV Figure 11
stick-in (draped)
LNV Figure 11
stick-in (draped)
LNV Figure 11
stick-in (draped)
LNV Figure 11
stick-in (draped)
UP DOWN
05 21
Up and hold.
LNV Figure 11
stick-in (draped)
UP DOWN
05 10
15 20
26 31
37 42
48 53
Up and hold.
(ETR only targets fall
when hit)
LNV Figure 11
stick-in (draped)
UP DOWN
05 18
Up and hold.
No time limit
UP DOWN
05 11
19 25
30 36
45 51
58 1:04
As for Practice 2
Remarks
Up and hold.
Up and hold.
(ETR only targets fall
when hit)
Up and hold.
(ETR only targets fall
when hit)
10-85
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-86
1. 1 x Figure 11.
2. 5 x 5 second exposures with irregular intervals.
1. Firer in the nominated position.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire one round at each exposure.
4. Targets fall when hit.
Practice 2. Rapid
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 1 x Figure 11.
2. 1 x 20 second exposure.
1. Firer in the nominated position.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire 10 rounds rapid.
4. Targets up and hold.
Practice 3. Snap
Range/Positioning
200 m Sitting
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 1 x Figure 11.
2. 5 x 6 second exposures with irregular intervals.
1. Firer in the nominated position.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire one round at each exposure.
4. Targets fall when hit.
5. Record the scores.
Practice 4. Rapid
Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1 x Figure 11.
1 x 20 second exposure.
Firer in the nominated position.
Order Watch and Shoot.
Fire 10 rounds rapid at the expo- sure.
Targets up and hold.
Record the scores.
Practice 5. Deliberate
Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 1 x Figure 11.
2. 10 x 6 second exposures with irregular intervals.
1. Firer in the nominated position.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire one round at each exposure.
4. Targets fall when hit.
5. Record the scores.
10-87
Scoring
10293. One point per hit.
Standards
HPS 40
Pass 28
End of Lesson Procedure
Time Chart
10294. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery
ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be
allowed.
10-88
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
Remarks
100 m
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 11
18 24
28 34
39 45
50 56
100 m
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 26
Up and hold.
200 m
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 12
19 26
30 37
43 50
55 1:02
200 m
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 26
Up and hold.
300 m
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 12
19 26
30 37
43 50
55 1:02
1:08 1:15
1:20 1:27
1:31 1:38
1:43 1:50
1:55 2:02
Ammunition
2 x 15 round magazines
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fire a five round group from prone, kneeling and standing positions.
2. Discuss the groups and record the group sizes.
3. Repeat the practice using IR laser.
10-89
75 mm
Kneeling
80 mm
Standing
140 mm
10-90
10-91
Practice Details
10312. The practice details are as follows:
Practice 1. Check groups
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As for Practice 1
Instructions
Fire a five round group in each firing position with each laser to
determine POA.
10-92
10-93
Ammunition
10 Rounds
1. Figure 12.
2. 2 x 20 second exposures with an interval to allow firers to adopt the
standing alert position.
1. Firer in the Standing Alert position with the HMNVS and LA On and
focused at 100 metres.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. On the appearance of the target the firer is to fire one round from
the standing position then adopt the kneeling position and fire a further
four rounds at the exposure.
4. Firers must adopt the Standing Alert position between exposures.
5. Target up and hold.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 2. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
5 Rounds
1. Figure 12.
2. 5 x 6 second exposures with irregular intervals.
1. Firer in the nominated position with the HMNVS and LA On and
focused at 100 metres.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire one round at each exposure.
4. Targets fall when hit.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3. Snap
Range/Positioning
200 m Sitting
Ammunition
5 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
2. 5 x 8 second exposures with irregular intervals.
1. Firer in the nominated position with the HMNVS and LA On and
focused at 200 metres.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire one round at each exposure.
4. Targets fall when hit.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4. Rapid
Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
2. 5 x 12 second exposures.
1. Firer in the nominated position with the HMNVS and LA On and
focused at 200 metres.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire two rounds at each exposure.
4. Targets fall when hit.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-94
Scoring
10322. Scores are to be recorded and announced on conclusion of each practice.
Practices 1 to 4 One point per hi
Standard
HPS 30
Pass 18
End of Lesson Procedure
Time Chart
10323. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery
ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be
allowed.
Practice
Range/Target
100 m
Figure 12
Up Down
05 26
Timings
Remarks
100 m
Figure 12
Up Down
05 12
18 25
29 36
41 48
51 58
200 m
Figure 11
Up Down
05 14
19 28
32 41
45 54
1:01 1:10
200 m
Figure 11
Up Down
05 18
24 37
42 55
1:02 1:15
1:19 1:32
10-95
Section 4
Close Quarter Marksmanship - Rifle/Pistol
10324. Close Quarter Marksmanship.
CQM shoots are mandatory for firers
employed in the DCC Role. The results are
to be recorded on unit computer systems.
Contents
CQM - THE TRANSITION
CQM - FIRING WHILST PIVOTING
OR TURNING
CQM - FIRING WHILST CLOSING
CQM - MOVING TARGET
10-98
10-103
10-105
10-107
10-96
f.
CQM LFMT 5 Pistol can be carried out as a single action. double action
or press drill practice to cover all the nuances of the weapon.
g. From CQM LFMT 6 onwards the firer should be encouraged to wear
their primary weapon and carry out a dry transition. This will not only practice
the firer in a realistic situation but reinforce the fact that the pistol is a
secondary weapon system and only used in an emergency.
h. The accuracy of the rifle and pistol differs and the scoring areas on the
tar- get reflect this(See fig 10-1a).
10328. Spotters. Where possible, to enable the firers and coaches to gain the
maximum benefit from the shots being fired, members of the waiting detail should
be employed as spotters, using binoculars to plot the arrival of each shot. To achieve
maximum training value from this type of firing, it is essential that firers are given every
opportunity to discuss the results of their shooting with their coach.
10-97
10335. Firing Practice. Explain to firers that shot accountability is an essential part
of CQM and that when carrying both a rifle and a pistol, the pistol will be immediately
employed in the event of a stoppage at 15 metres and under.
Practice Details
10336. Practice details are as follows:
Practice 1. Shot Accountability
Range/Positioning
3m Standing
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 28
4 x 4 second Exposures
1. Firer is to be in the CQB stance on the command stating a shape,
colour or position eg blue square fire 2 Rounds.
2. Firer is to make up shots for any that fall outside of the area or dot.
3. Order Watch and Shoot.
4. Repeat four times
5. Record scores
3m Standing
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 28
2 x 4 second Exposures
1. Firer is to be in the CQB stance on the command stating two
shapes,colours or positions eg blue square and top dot fire 2 Rounds
at each.
2. Firer is to make up shots for any that fall outside of the area or dot.
3. Order Watch and Shoot.
4. Repeat practice.
5. Record scores
3m Standing
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 11/21
2 x 4 second Exposures
1. Firer in the CQB stance.
2. Fire two shots at the body and two at the head in each engagement.
3. Discuss the fall of shot.
4. Repeat the practice
10-99
Instructions
15 m Standing
2 x 5.56mm Rounds
4 x 9mm Rounds
1. Fig 11/21.
2. 2 x 7 second exposures.
1. Firer in the Standing CQB Position.
2. Once the target is exposed and on attempting to fire the second
round, the firer identifies that he has a stoppage.
3. Transit to the pistol and engage with two Rounds.
4. Carry out the empty magazine stoppage drill between exposures.
5. Repeat the practice.
6. Record scores.
Instructions
10 m Standing
6 x 5.56mm Rounds
4 x 9mm Rounds
1. Fig 11/21.
2. 2 x 8 second exposures.
1. Firer in the Standing CQB Position.
2. On the appearance of the target, the firer will carry out a fail to stop
engagement until identifying that he has a stoppage.
3. Transit to the pistol and engage with two rounds to the head.
4. Carry out a magazine empty stoppage drill between exposures.
5. Repeat the practice.
6. Record scores.
10-100
5 m Standing
6 x 5.56mm Rounds
4 x 9mm Rounds
1. Fig 11/21.
2. 2 x 8 second exposures.
As per Practice 2.
Practice 4. Static Transition from Rifle in the Standing to Pistol in the Kneeling
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Scoring
10337. For the rifle Two points per hit within the inner scoring area. One point within
the outer scoring area. No points anywhere else on the target. For the pistol Two
points per hit within the inner and outer scoring area. One point per hit anywhere else
on the target.
Firers Goals and Progress
Practice 1&2 HPS 16 Pass - 11
Practice 3 familiarisation only
Practice 4-7 HPS - 64 Pass 45
End of Lesson Procedure
10-101
10-102
10 metres
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 2 x Fig 21/11.
2. 5 x 4 second exposures
1. Ensuring that safety catches are applied and muzzles are pointed in
a safe direction, face to the RIGHT.
2. If pistols are used, then each expo- sure must begin with weapons
de- cocked and holstered.
3. On command or appearance of the target, pivot to the LEFT and
engage with two Rounds.
4. Repeat four times.
10-103
10 metres
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 2 x Fig 21/11.
2. 5 x 4 second exposures
1. Ensuring that safety catches are applied and muzzles are pointed in
a safe direction, face to the LEFT.
2. On command or appearance of the target, pivot to the RIGHT and
engage with two Rounds.
3. Repeat four times.
10 metres
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 2 x Fig 21/11.
2. 6 x 4 second exposures
1. Ensuring that safety catches are applied and muzzles are pointed in
a safe direction the firer starts facing away from the target.
2. On the command LEFT or RIGHT Threat, pivot in the given
direction and engage with two Rounds.
3. When pivoting to the left, the firers will engage the target on the left;
from the right, the target on the right.
4. Repeat five times, alternating left and right.
5. Discuss results and record scores.
Scoring
10346. TLFTT3109. For the rifle Two points per hit within the inner scoring area.
One point within the outer scoring area. No points anywhere else on the target. For
the pistol Two points per hit within the inner and outer scoring area. One point per hit
anywhere else on the target.
Firers Goals and Progress
HPS 64
Pass 44
End of Lesson Procedure
10-104
Ammunition
18 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 2 x Fig 21/11.
2. 3 x 5 second exposures
1. Firer starts in the Standing CQB position at the 25m point.
2. On command or appearance of the target, fire six shots whilst
closing.
3. Repeat the practice twice. Record the scores.
10-105
Ammunition
12 Rounds
1. 2 x Fig 21/11.
2. 2 x 7 second exposures
1. Firer starts in the Standing CQB position at the 25m point facing
RIGHT.
2. On command or appearance of the target, pivot to the Left, fire six
shots whilst closing.
3. Repeat the practice. Record the scores.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Ammunition
12 Rounds
1. 2 x Fig 21/11.
2. 2 x 7 second exposures
1. Firer starts in the Standing CQB position at the 25m point facing
LEFT.
2. On command or appearance of the target, pivot to the Right, fire six
shots whilst closing.
3. Repeat the practice. Record the scores.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4. Pivoting 180 degrees to the Left and Right and closing
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
12 Rounds
1. 2 x Fig 21/11.
2. 2 x 8 second exposures
1. Firer starts in the Standing CQB position at the 25m point facing
REARWARDS.
2. On command or appearance of the target, pivot 180 degrees to the
Left/Right as ordered, fire six shots whilst closing.
3. Repeat the practice. Record the scores.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Scoring
10355. Two points per hit in the CQM scoring area and one point per hit any- where
else on the target
Firers Goals and Progress
HPS
108
Pass 75
End of Lesson Procedure
10-106
Moving Target
Close Quarter Marksmanship
Identifying Lead With Personal Weapons
A. RCO Notes
10356. Aim. To identify lead when engaging moving targets at close quarters.
10357. Conduct. The lesson should be conducted on a suitable training area using
Marker Round Training System (MRTS) using correctly protected demonstration
troops as enemy. Alternatively the lesson can be conducted on the DCCT.
10358. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 30 minutes to complete all
practices.
10359. Stores. Normal range stores.
2 x Figure 20 Target.
MRTS conversion kits per weapon
112 Rounds 5.56 mm or 9 mm MRTS ammunition per firer.
10-107
Ammunition
48 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
AT EACH RANGE.
SLOW
3 x left and 3 x right runs of the enemy.
Followed by
FAST
3 x left and 3 x right runs of the enemy.
1. At each exposure fire 1 round.
2. During the shoot discuss (or firers identify) the fall of shot in relation
to the POA and the centre of the target.
3. Record lead at each range.
Ammunition
64 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
SLOW / FAST
4 x left and 4 x right runs of the enemy. At each range 50% fast 50%
slow in random order.
1. At each exposure fire 2 Rounds.
2. Record lead after each range
Scoring
10363. The shoot is not scored as the aim is to identify POA and lead.
End of Lesson Procedure
10-108
Section 5
Close Quarter Marksmanship- LMG
10364. Close Quarter Marksmanship.
CQM shoots are mandatory for firers
employed in the DCC Role. The results
are to be recorded on unit computer
systems.
Contents
CQM - IDENTIFY POA
CQM - ACCELERATED FIRE
CQM - FAILURE TO STOP
CQM - MULIPLE TARGETS
CQM - FIRING WHILST TURNING/PIVOTING
CQM - FIRING WHILST CLOSING
10-111
10-112
10-114
10-116
10-118
10-120
10369. Spotters. Where possible, to enable the firers and coaches to gain the
maximum benefit from the shots being fired, members of the waiting detail should
be employed as spotters, using binoculars to plot the arrival of each shot. To achieve
maximum training value from this type of firing, it is essential that firers are given every
opportunity to discuss the results of their shooting with their coach.
10-110
Ammunition
2 x belts of 24.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. From each range fire 2 bursts of 2-3 rds at a 25mm white patch.
2. Discuss the fall of shot in relation to the point of aim.
3. Repeat the practice to confirm the established POA.
4. Record the POA.
15m Standing.
Ammunition
2 x belts of 18
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-112
1. Fig 21.
5 second exposures until 18 rds completed.
1. During each exposure at the left hand target fire 2 bursts of 2 to 3
rds with a 2 second shot cadence. Up to 18 Rounds.
2. Dress forward and discuss the results.
3. Repeat the practice on the right target.
4. Dress forward and discuss the results, record the scores on the
right target only.
10m Standing
Ammunition
2 x belts of 18
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 21.
5 second exposures until 18 rds completed
Instructions
As for Practice 1.
5m Standing
Ammunition
2 x belts of 18
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 21.
5 second exposures until 18 rds completed.
Instructions
3m Standing
Ammunition
2 x belts of 18
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 21.
5 second exposures until 18 rds completed.
Instructions
Scoring
10385. Two points per hit within the inner scoring area. One point within the outer
scoring area. No points anywhere else on the target.
Firers Goals and Progress
HPS 144
Pass 86
End of Lesson Procedure
10-113
15m Standing
Ammunition
1x belt of 16
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-114
1. Fig 21.
2. 4 second exposures until Rounds completed.
1. Firer in the CQB stance.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. During each exposure fire a burst of 2-3 rds to the body and one
burst to the head.
4. Discuss the fall of shot, record scores and patch up. 2 second shot
cadence.
10m Standing
Ammunition
1x belt of 16
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 21.
2. 4 second exposures until Rounds completed.
As for Practice 1.
2 second shot cadence.
5m Standing
Ammunition
1x belt of 16
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 21.
2. 4 second exposures until Rounds completed.
As for Practice 1.
1.5 second shot cadence.
3m Standing
Ammunition
1x belt of 16
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 21.
2. 4 second exposures until Rounds completed.
As for Practice 1.
1 second shot cadence.
Scoring
10393. Two points per hit within the inner scoring area. One point within the outer
scoring area. No points anywhere else on the target.
Firers Goals and Progress
HPS 128
Pass 77
End of Lesson Procedure
10-115
15m Standing
Ammunition
2 x belts of 16
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-116
1. Fig 21.
2. 4 second exposures until Rounds completed.
1. On command or appearance of the targets, firers are to engage
both targets in the order given in the safety brief with a burst of 2-3
Rounds.
2. After completion of the first belt dress for- ward and discuss the
results. Clean targets.
3. Repeat the practice and record the scores of the repeat practice
only. 2 second shot cadence.
Practice 2. Pairs
Range/Positioning
10m Standing
Ammunition
2 x belts of 16
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 21.
2. 4 second exposures until Rounds completed.
As for Practice 1.
1.5 second shot cadence.
Practice 3. Pairs
Range/Positioning
5m Standing
Ammunition
2 x belts of 16
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 21.
2. 4 second exposures until Rounds completed
As for Practice 1.
1 second shot cadence.
Practice 4. Pairs
Range/Positioning
3m Standing
Ammunition
2 x belts of 16
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 21.
2. 4 second exposures until Rounds completed.
As for Practice 1.
1 second shot cadence.
Scoring
10401. Two points per hit within the inner scoring area. One point within the outer
scoring area. No points anywhere else on the target.
Firers Goals and Progress
HPS 128.
Pass 77
End of Lesson Procedure
10-117
10 metres
Ammunition
1 x belt of 12 rds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-118
1. Fig 21
2. 5 second exposures until Rounds complete.
1. Ensuring that safety catches are applied and muzzles are pointed in
a safe direction, face to the RIGHT.
2. On command or appearance of the target, pivot to the LEFT and
engage with a burst of 2-3 Rounds.
10 metres
Ammunition
1 x belt of 12 rds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 21
2. 5 second exposures until Rounds complete.
1. Ensuring that safety catches are applied and muzzles are pointed in
a safe direction, face to the LEFT.
2. On command or appearance of the target, pivot to the RIGHT and
engage with a burst of 2-3 Rounds.
10 metres
Ammunition
1 x belt of 20 rds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 21
2. 5 second exposures until Rounds complete.
1. Ensuring that safety catches are applied and muzzles are pointed in
a safe direction the firer starts facing away from the target.
2. On the command LEFT or RIGHT Threat, pivot in the given
direction and engage with a burst of 2-3 Rounds.
3. When pivoting to the left, the firers will engage the target on the left;
from the right, the target on the right.
3. Discuss and record scores.
Scoring
10410. For the rifle Two points per hit within the inner scoring area. One point within
the outer scoring area. No points anywhere else on the target. For the pistol Two
points per hit within the inner and outer scoring area. One point per hit anywhere else
on the target.
Firers Goals and Progress
HPS 88
Pass 53
End of Lesson Procedure
10-119
Ammunition
3 x belt of 9 rds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-120
1. Fig 21.
2. 1 x 8 second exposures
1. Firer starts in the Standing CQB position at the 15m point.
2. On command or appearance of the target, fire 3 bursts of 2-3 rds
whilst closing.
3. Repeat the practice twice. Record the scores.
Ammunition
2 x belt of 9 rds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 21.
2. 1 x 8 second exposures.
1. Firer starts in the Standing CQB position at the 15m point facing
RIGHT.
2. On command or appearance of the target, pivot to the Left; fire 3
bursts of 2-3 rds whilst closing.
3. Repeat the practice. Record the scores.
Ammunition
2 x belt of 9 rds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 21.
2. 1 x 8 second exposures.
1. Firer starts in the Standing CQB position at the 15m point facing
LEFT.
2. On command or appearance of the target, pivot to the right; fire 3
bursts of 2-3 rds whilst closing.
3. Repeat the practice. Record the scores.
Practice 4. Pivoting 180 degrees to the Left and Right and closing
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
2 x belt of 9 rds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 21.
2. 1 x 8 second exposure.
1. Firer starts in the Standing CQB position at the 15m point facing
REARWARDS.
2. On command or appearance of the target, pivot 180 degrees to the
Left/Right as ordered, fire 3 bursts of 2-3 rds whilst closing.
3. Repeat the practice. Record the scores.
Scoring
10418. Two points per hit in the CQM scoring area and one point per hit any- where
else on the target
Firers Goals and Progress
HPS 162
Pass 81
End of Lesson Procedure
10-121
Section 6
Fire and Movement Test
10419. Introduction. The Fire and Movement Test is only to be conducted by firers
employed in the Basic Close Combat Role in accordance with the Commanders
Guide Table 1 within Chapter 1. It is intended to conduct this shoot on completion of
the ACMT in lieu of any form of LFTT, but will enable a 4-man team to operate together
whilst advancing towards the enemy.
10420. Constraint. It is not permissible to move from the Fire and Movement Test
to LFTT without complying to the Progression of Training table specified in Chapter 1
of this publication.
10421. Dress. Should include belt order webbing. Combat helmets and Issued Body
Armour are to be worn.
10-122
b.
2 x Riflemen.
c.
1 x LSW Firer.
10426. Aim. The aim of the test is to identify the fire teams ability to put down
effective fire whilst under physical stress..
10427. Rules.
a. Firers must have passed the ACMT and conducted a dry rehearsal
of the F&M test before the test is fired In particular the actions to take in
the event of a stoppage during the test must be practiced. This is especially
important for less experienced firers.
b. The time for the 300m move is 90 seconds, carrying the equipment
described below. All the fire team members must complete the move together.
On arrival at the 300m firing point they are allowed 30 seconds to prepare
themselves for the start of the shooting practice. No extra time will be given
for stoppages during the shoot. Any firer that fails to be in position to start the
shoot in the required time frame will not be permitted to continue with the test.
The firer is to be re-tested at the earliest opportunity.
c. Dress and equipment for this test is to be combat dress, belt order
webbing (including filled magazines), combat body armour (as issued),
combat helmets, (issued, serviceable hearing protection is to be worn on the
range). Equipment is to be packed in accordance with unit SOPs and should
weigh 11.4 kg (25 lb) for males and females. The weight is in addition to the
helmets, body armour and personal weapons.
d.
10-123
e.
f.
Exposure times are to be taken from the time the target is up and steady.
g. Once made ready, all movement must be conducted with the safety
catch applied.
h. Once the firers target has been hit or lowered, the firer is to apply their
safety catch in preparation of the move forward
10428. Ammunition/Magazines. Firers are allocated 21 Rounds. Magazines are to
be filled 1 x 5, 1 x 16.
10429. Scoring. One point per hit.
10430. Standards. During each tactical bound each firer must hit all Fig 12 exposures
(HPS 7) or the firer will be deemed to have failed the test. Any firer that fails the OMS
is to be re-tested at the earliest opportunity as part of a composite Fire Team.
10431. Explanatory Notes.
a. The minimum words of command should be given by the conducting
officer. It is important that control of the fire team is exercised by the fire team
commander and that all firers understand the practices they are to fire.
b. It is the firers responsibility to ensure that they have sufficient Rounds
loaded in their weapon.
c. Safety Supervisors are to be positioned behind the rear men of the Fire
Teams throughout the Fire and Movement phase.
d. It is recommended to have two dedicated console monitors to check if
the targets have been hit during each bound, in addition to an OIC console.
10432. Range Rigging. The range is to be rigged as follows:
ETR 100m Figure 12
CGR Figure 12 placed in FETs
GR Figure 12 Target line forward of the mantlet.
6 x 8m markers are to be positioned as per Fig 10-2b.
10-124
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Firers are to adopt the prone position at the 600m (ETR) or 400m
(CGR/GR) firing point and be aligned to their respective lane number.
2. Once in position, order Load, Watch Out, Watch Out.
3. Following a one second flash exposure of the Fig 12 targets, the
firers are to move to the 300m Fixed Firing Point (ETR) or the 100m
Firing Point (CGR) within 90 seconds. At the Firing Point the Fire Team
is to cover off the targets as follows:
a. Fire Team 1.
(1) Rifleman Tgt1
(2) Comd Tgt 2
(3) LSW Tgt 3
(4) Rifleman Tgt 4
b. Fire Team 2.
(1) Rifleman Tgt 9
(2) Comd Tgt 10
(3) LSW Tgt 11
(4) Rifleman Tgt 12
4. On arrival at the 300m Fixed Firing Point (ETR) or 100m Firing Point
(CGR) and after the 90 seconds has expired, the FIre Team is awarded
an additional 30 seconds to prepare to continue with the shoot, this will
include RCO initial words of command and a move to the 75m Firing
Point on a GR (120 seconds in total).
5. Once the team is in position at the Firing Point and during the 30
seconds preparation time, RCO is to order Adopt the kneeling or
squatting position, ready?.
6. When the word of command Ready is issued and if a firer is not in
a position to continue with Practice 1, the firer is to be disqualified and
will not complete the remainder of the shoot.
10-125
Practice 1.
Range
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-126
Range
Lanes
Approach
March
600m/400m
1, 2, 3, 4, 9,
10, 11 and 12
The Move
600m to
300m FFP
or
400m to
100m FP
ETR/CGR
100m
Timings
Up
Down
10 12
N/A
No targets
exposed. After
120 seconds,
reset stopwatch.
1, 2, 3, 4, 9,
10, 11 and 12
10 18
92m or 67m
1, 2, 9 and 10
First Pairs
Bound Marker 1
23 31
GR
75m
1 (Cont)
Remarks
1 second flash exposure at
600m
120 second delay: 90
seconds for the move,
30 seconds to be into
position and receive initial
instructions. Stopwatch
reset.
Watch and Shoot is
ordered, then a 10 second
pause followed by the first 7
second exposure as shown.
Targets fall when hit. When
all targets are down, 1,
2, 9 and 10 only move from
FFP to bound 1. Remaining
firers stay firm at 300m FFP.
7 second exposure. Targets
fall when hit. When targets
are engaged rear pairs can
move up level to bound 1
and go firm.
10-127
Practice
Range
Lanes
92m or 67m
3, 4, 11 and
First Pairs
12
Bound Marker 1
10-128
Timings
Up
Down
36 44
84m or 59m
1, 2, 9, 10
First Pairs
Bound Marker 2
49 57
84m or59m
3, 4, 11, 12
Bound Marker 2
1:02 1:10
76m or 51m
1, 2, 9, 10
Bound Marker 3
1:15 1:23
76m or 51m
3, 4, 11, 12
Bound Marker 3
1:28 1:36
68m or 43m 1, 2, 9, 10
Bound Marker 4
1:41 1:49
1:54 2:02
60m or 35m 1, 2, 9, 10
Bound Marker 5
2:07 2:15
2:20 2:28
52m or 27m 1, 2, 9, 10
Bound Marker 6
2:33 2:41
2:46 2:54
Remarks
Second pairs engage
targets in their own lanes.
When all targets go down,
first pairs only to move to
bound 2. Remaining firers
to go firm at bound 1.
7 second exposure. Targets
fall when hit. When targets
are engaged rear pairs can
move up level to bound 2.
The above procedure is
continued up to bound 6.
75
Fig 10-2a Layout of the GR for the Fire and Movement Test
Fig 10-2b Layout of the ETR/CGR for the Fire and Movement Test
10-129
10-130
CHAPTER 11
LIVE FIRING TACTICAL TRAINING
(PERSONAL WEAPONS)
Scope
1101. Chapter 11 covers the final
stage of Training the Battle Shot Live
Firing Tactical Training (LFTT). This is the
culmination of Army Operational Shooting
training.
Contents
SCOPE 11-1
IFFC 11-1
THE FIRE TEAM ATTACK CONCEPT
11-1
THE CHAIN OF COMMAND
11-2
SAFETY 11-3
THE FIRE TEAM ATTACK
11-4
11-1
1108. To enable the Chain of Command to assess each fire team within a sub unit,
the fire team attack as described in Section 1 of this chapter is to be conducted. With
good range planning and use of resources, the 18 fire teams within a DCC Roled
Company will be able to be exercised over the same ground during a two day training
package. However, it may not be possible to assess the standards between companies
if the same ground is not used due to the differences between each LFTTA.
1109. Evaluation. Evaluation of tactical fire effect will be important. Under direction
from Formation Commanders, an assessment of operational capability is to be made.
1110. MFP2. COs are to report the achievements of IFFCs as part of unit MFP2
returns. Any resource or administrative difficulties limiting the achievement of IFFCs
are also to be recorded in a PXR and referred to the relevant formation HQ and range
organisation.
The Chain of Command
1111. Role of Formation Commanders. Formation Commanders have a key
responsibility in directing and facilitating IFFCs in the following ways:
a. Establishing training and operational priorities for COs to ensure the
right doctrinal emphasis and the right balance of offensive and defensive
LFTT exercises.
b. Ensuring COs have the resources to achieve the minimum mandatory
objectives during IFFCs.
c. Resourcing COs to undertake battalion-level LFTT when and where
achievable and in line with overall priorities.
d. Directing COs to undertake IFFCs as part of overseas training exercises
(OTX), when battalions are allocated such an exercise and otherwise would
be unable to complete field firing within their annual training year.
e. Monitoring LFTT to ensure MFP2 returns are completed and meet the
mandatory requirements of Army Operational Shooting.
1112. Reserve Infantry Battalions and BCC Roled Units. It is recognised for
Reserve Infantry battalions that the opportunities for LFTT will be limited. Therefore
whilst it cannot be a mandatory requirement for Reserve Infantry battalions to carry
out an IFFC, where possible a four day IFFC(Reserve) should be conducted on all
Annual Camps/Concentrations where facilities exist and ammunition is available.
Furthermore, LFTT is not mandatory for Other Arms and Services. Such units are to
undertake LFTT as directed and re-sourced within the Chain of Command; and LFTT
records are to be completed as part of unit MFP returns. The LFTT should reflect the
units operational role.
11-2
Safety
1113. Under no circumstances is a soldier to progress to LFTT unless the soldier
has achieved the required standards on the mandatory LFMT and TLFTT shoots (see
Progression of Training Table in Chapter 1) in the previous 12 months, WHTs have
been completed within the previous six months and the zero of his personal weapon
has been checked.
1114. All LFTT is to be planned and executed in strict accordance with Reference A
(Pamphlet No. 21). Reference A gives sufficient scope to achieve the required results.
In particular, safety and supervision regulations are not to be compromised in the
pursuit of realism.
11-3
b.
SDM (LSW).
c.
Gunner (LMG).
d.
1118. Aim. The aim of the shoot is to identify the Fire Teams ability to put down
effective fire, this includes suppressive fire, and assault an enemy position. The
Fire Team will complete this whilst under physical stress, having first completed an
approach march.
1119.
Rules.
a. The Fire Team must have zeroed weapons, passed the ACMT,
completed the relevant operational shooting skills and completed the
Progression of Training Table (laid out in Chapter 1) before conducting the
Fire Team Attack. Where UGL Practice rounds and grenades are employed
the nominated users must be qualified in line with the regulations.
b. The Fire Team will complete a 1.2km approach march before the Live
Firing phase of the FTA. The finish point of the approach march should be
the Battle Preparation Area, where they will be given an additional 2 mins
preparation time before starting the Advance.
c. The time for the 1.2 km approach march should be determined by the
Commanding Officer and may be varied to cater for abnormal local terrain
and weather conditions. As a guide, 10 minutes should be allocated. All the
fire team members must complete the approach march together.
11-4
b.
SDM (LSW)
90 x 5.56mm ball/tracer
c.
Gunner (LMG)
d.
Explanatory Notes.
a. A safety brief is to be delivered to all exercising troops prior to
the approach march commencing in accordance with Pamphlet No. 21
(Reference A).
b. The Fire Team Comd is to be briefed by the RCO that his mission is
to complete the approach march in the specified time, arrive in the battle
preparation area, where he is allocated two minutes for team administration
and then advance and destroy all enemy within his area.
c. Weapons will be loaded (less UGL) prior to the approach march, but
only made ready in the battle preparation area, which must be contained
within the LFTT movement box.
d. The minimum words of command should be given by the conducting
officer. It is important that control of the fire team is exercised by the fire team
commander.
11-5
Hits on target.
(2)
(3)
(4)
h. Once SARTS is in service the new targets will provide the means to
measure suppressive fire through an automated after action review. This FTA
is designed, in part, to build awareness of the use of suppressive fire.
i.
The following example shows the calculation to be used to obtain the
Fire Teams percentage of hits on target against rounds fired and thus provide
a percent score.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Firstly identify how many rounds were fired. Then take the total hits on
target and divide it by the total rounds fired. Then multiply this figure by
100 to give you the % score.
11-6
(4)
(5)
(6)
Location
Arrive Battle
Preparation Area
(Within Movement Box)
Approx
Running Time
0 10 mins
Instruction/Activity
NSPs, Safety and range briefings, load
weapons, order Fire Team to move to
Battle Preparation Area
10 mins
Battle Preparation
Area
10 12 mins
17 mins
Contact Line
17 20 mins
Contact Line
20 21 mins
Fire Support
Position
21 24 mins
30 mins
En position
35 mins
11-7
CHAPTER 12
AMMUNITION SCALES (PERSONAL WEAPONS)
Scope
1201. This chapter sets out the
ammunition scales required in all Live
Firing (LF) lessons for Personal Weapons
contained in Volume 1 of the OSP. The
distribution is based on the scale for each
individual by weapons for Live Firing
Marksmanship Training (LFMT) up to and
including Collective Performance (CP)
level 2, the Annual Combat Marksmanship
Test (ACMT) and the LF Shoots for
Operational Shooting Skills.
Contents
SCOPE 12-1
LAYOUT 12-1
RIFLE AMMUNITION TABLES
12-1
LSW AMMUNITION TABLES
12-3
LSW (SDM) AMMUNITION TABLES
12-3
L129A1 SHARPSHOOTER
12-4
LMG AMMUNITION TABLES
12-5
PISTOL AMMUNITION TABLES
12-7
OPERATIONAL SHOOTING SKILLS
12-8
GUIDE TO LFTT
12-10
1202. The scales of ammunition also include those shoots that have been designed
to be fired using DCCT but which can also be fired live in the absence of simulators.
Layout
1203. Each weapon has a series of tables indicating quantities of ammunition
allocated for the various stages of LFMT for Training the Battle Shot.
1204. Ammunition for Transition to Live Firing Tactical Training (TLFTT) (Fire and
Movement Test and IBSR Shoots) and Live Firing Tactical Training (LFTT) is to be
provided from Theatre and command pools.
Rifle Ammunition Tables
1205. Regular and Reserve Units Initial Training. Listed in the following tables
are the quantities of ammunition a trainee requires to complete one attempt at each of
the LFMT lessons that are to be fired during initial training.
12-1
Ser
LF Lesson
40
50
12
24
80
64
64
Remarks
11
45
12
50/60
10
14
32
11
15
32/45
12
16
20
13
17
20
14
18
10
BCC/DCC
BCC/DCC
ACMT
69/79
16
CBRN
40
Grand Total
588/685
BCC/DCC
BCC/DCC
1206. Regular and Reserve Units Annual Training. Listed in the following
table are the quantities of ammunition a firer requires to complete one attempt at each
of the LFMT lessons fired annually:
Ser
LF Lesson
Remarks
ACMT Prep
85/91
BCC/DCC
ACMT
79
CBRN
40
Grand Total
12-2
204/210
BCC/DCC
LF Lesson
Remarks
12
33
54
ACMT
93
LFMT Stage 3 Annual Combat Marksmanship Test (ACMT)
CBRN
Grand Total
73
40
119
220
1208. Regular and Reserve Units Annual Training. Listed in the following
table are the quantities of ammunition a firer requires to complete one attempt at each
of the LFMT lessons fired annually:
Ser
LF Lesson
ACMT Prep
Remarks
ACMT
73
CBRN
40
40
153
Grand Total
12-3
Ser
LF Lesson
34
12
20
35
35
62
41
ACMT
Remarks
CBRN
Grand Total
85
40
106
258
1210. Regular and Reserve Units Annual Training. Listed in the following
table are the quantities of ammunition a firer requires to complete one attempt at each
of the LFMT lessons fired annually:
Ser
LF Lesson
ACMT Prep
75
Remarks
ACMT
85
CBRN
40
115
85
Grand Total
12-4
Ser
LF Lesson
Remarks
56
LFMT Stage 2 Application of Fire
39
21
27
50
33
ACMT
61
CBRN
40
Grand Total
327
Including ACMT.
1212. Regular and Reserve Units Annual Training. Listed in the following
table are the quantities of ammunition a firer requires to complete one attempt at each
of the LFMT lessons fired annually:
Ser
LF Lesson
Remarks
ACMT Prep
63
LFMT Stage 3 ACMT
ACMT
61
CBRN
40
Grand Total
164
12-5
Ser
LF Lesson
Remarks
30
60
60
60
See Note 1.
65
See Note 1.
95
See Note 1.
ACMT
145
See Note 1.
160
See Note 1.
150
525
See Note 2.
CBRN
Grand Total
Notes:
1.
5.56 mm 4B1T may be substituted with 5.56 mm Ball Belted during Tracer
bans.
2.
Dependant on sighting system used.
1214. Regular and Reserve Units Annual Training. Listed in the following table
are the quantities of ammunition required to complete one attempt at each of the
LFMT lessons that are to be fired annually by all whose personal weapon is the LMG:
Ser
LF Lesson
ACMT Prep
125
Remarks
ACMT
145
See Note 1.
CBRN
160
See Note 1.
125
305
Grand Total
12-6
LF Lesson
Remarks
30
24
48
32
32
39
ACMT
32
CBRN
Grand Total
18
255
Including ACMT
1216. Pistol User Annual Training. Listed in the following table are the quantities
of ammunition required to complete one attempt at each of the LFMT lessons that are
to be fired during annual training by all Arms and Services personnel whose personal
weapon is the pistol:
Ser
LF Lesson
Remarks
ACMT Prep
38
ACMT
32
CBRN
18
Grand Total
88
12-7
9 mm
Ball
Ctn
Qty
Ser
LF Lesson
24
72
30
25
40
30
50
25
120
10
50
11
16
12
60
13
48
14
16
16
15
32
32
16
54
54
12-8
5.56 mm
4B1T/Ball
Belted
Qty
Remarks
If DCCT not
available
Ser
LF Lesson
5.56 mm
Ball Ctn
Qty
9 mm
Ball
Ctn
Qty
112
112
5.56 mm
4B1T/Ball
Belted
Qty
Remarks
17
MRTS
18
19
100
20
90
21
25
22
65
23
100
24
90
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
CLF Directive
to be fired
annually
32
CLF Directive
to be fired
annually
33
L129A1-Advanced Application Of
Fire 700 800 Metres
If DCCT not
available
If DCCT not
available
12-9
Ser
LF Lesson
34
35
36
37
38
39
5.56 mm
Ball Ctn
Qty
9 mm
Ball
Ctn
Qty
5.56 mm
4B1T/Ball
Belted
Qty
Remarks
Ball/4B1T
(per LSW)
Ball/4B1T Belted
(per LMG)
Offensive
40
60
50
60
60
100
60
180
200
120
180
200
120
330
600
120
330
400
Defensive
20
120
200
30
120
200
20
120
200
TOTALS
600
1500
2150
12-10
CHAPTER 13
OPERATIONAL SHOOTING COMPETITIONS
General
1301. The aim of this chapter is
to provide guidance for the planning
and subsequent management of an
Operational
Shooting
Competition
(OSC).
1302. The chapter is structured in
a such a way as to provide the user
with the overarching information and
key considerations required to plan an
OSC as well as the more intimate detail
of subsequent management. In order
to give planners maximum autonomy,
the guidance avoids, where possible,
mandating procedure and instead offers
examples of proven good practice that
may be replicated in their entirety or
simply referenced as a guide. A number
of enclosures are included (electronic
version only), offering examples of the
key documents required in the planning
process. Enclosures associated with this
chapter are:
Contents
GENERAL 13-1
POLICY & MANAGEMENT 13-2
PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS 13-2
GENERAL RULES 13-4
COMPETITORS AND TEAMS 13-5
DRESS AND EQUIPMENT 13-6
MOBILE COMMUNICATION 13-7
EXCESS HITS 13-7
PROTESTS AND RE-SHOOTS 13-8
MARKING AND SCORING 13-8
CLOSE QUARTER BATTLE STYLE SCORING 13-9
CHALLENGES 13-10
DISQUALIFICATION 13-11
FORFEITURE AND DEDUCTION OF POINTS
13-11
ILLEGAL MODIFICATION OF WEAPON
13-11
WEAPON BREAKAGES
13-11
TYPES OF TARGET & VALUE OF HITS
13-12
TIMING 13-13
GUIDANCE FOR RANGE STAFF
13-16
STATISTICAL STAFF
13-17
SAFETY 13-17
FIRING POINT PROCEDURE
13-17
SQUADDING CARDS
13-18
AMMUNITION 13-18
a.
Administration Instruction
b.
Scoring Matrix
c.
Squadding Matrix
d.
Squadding Cards
e.
f.
Butt Registers
g.
Marshalling Duties.
13-1
Time available.
b.
Range space.
c.
Number of competitors.
d.
Ammunition available.
1310. The programme and time table for issue to staff and competitors must contain:
13-2
a.
The programme.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Administrative arrangements.
1311. Timings. The preparation of timetables requires knowledge of the time taken
to fire the various assessments. Care must be taken to allow sufficient time for each
detail, otherwise competitors may be rushed or the programme will run late. Timings
for each shoot are in Chapter 14.
1312. Composition of Teams. Teams should be organised at various levels, e.g.
Company, Platoon and Section. It is recommended that the assessments should be
based on Section teams with inter-Sub Unit championships decided on the aggregate
of scores made by a number of Section teams. The rank structure of the team will
depend on the rank structure of the unit. The aim must be to devise a rank structure
which will exercise a cross section of the unit and should always include a number of
Officers, NCOs and new competitors.
1313. Squadding. Well planned squadding arrangements are the key to an efficient
operational shooting competition. An example of a squadding matrix is included as an
enclosure to this publication. The following is a guide to the steps required to squad
a unit meeting:
a. Plan the design of the squadding cards (if used). Specimen cards are
included as an enclosure to this publication.
b. Use a colour code particularly for the different practices of a specific
assessment.
c. If the cards are to be printed commercially order them well in advance
and ensure that there is sufficient income to cover the cost.
d.
Enter squadding details on the cards e.g. detail and target numbers.
e. Prepare a list of teams and individuals entered for the meeting and allot
a serial number to each team and individual. These serial numbers will save a
great deal of time and prevent errors being made in the identification of cards.
f.
i.
Issue squadding cards and/or range programme to Team Captains the
day before the meeting.
13-3
j.
During the squadding process location of ranges and distance between
them must be considered.
k. If transport to and from ranges is necessary, teams should be squadded
together for assessments in order to reduce the transport burden.
1314. Team Captain Briefing. A mandatory conference and briefing for Team
Captains should be held on the day prior to the start of the meeting. Details will be
published on registration.
1315. Prizes and Ties. The individual and team prizes available to competitors
should be promulgated prior to the competition. An example prize list with details of
the tie procedure is included as an annex to the enclosed administrative instruction.
1316. The decision to award individual and aggregate prizes is entirely at the
discretion of the organisers i.e. a series of scores from separate assessments may be
combined to award a Champion at Arms or Champion Team prize.
1317. Team Selection and Training. Much of the value of an OSC lies in
the selection and training of individuals and teams. Details of the meeting should
be published as far ahead as possible, and the programme should allow time for
individuals and teams to train.
General Rules
1318. These rules are intended as a guide and as such units are at liberty to make
alterations as they see fit providing that safety and the general spirit of competition
shooting is not compromised.
1319. Any infringements of the rules may disqualify a team or individual or cause
penalties to be inflicted. This is entirely the decision of the organising unit, with
consistency and fairness being of the utmost importance.
1320. The SPO is empowered to alter the programme, including the cancellation
of assessments, should the weather conditions or other unforeseen circumstances
warrant it.
1321. Weapons General. Service weapons must be as issued. They are not to be
modified in anyway and must not include privately purchased accessories i.e. down
grips, hand protectors etc.
1322. Rifles. The Service Rifle may be equipped with either Optic or Iron sights.
Competitors with Iron sights should not compete against those with Optics and vice
versa. In circumstances where both types of sights are used at an OSC, a separate
prize list should be published.
13-4
1323. Ammunition. Only ammunition issued for the assessment will be used. Unfired rounds in any phase/practice will be forfeited and not used for any subsequent
phase/practice, unless otherwise stated in the assessment conditions. Competition
planners should not allow teams to bring and fire their own ammunition.
Competitors and Teams
1324. Eligibility. Eligibility criteria will be detailed in the administrative instruction
and is to be fair and unambiguous. All competitors must have passed Weapon Handling
Tests (WHT) and Annual Combat Marksmanship Test (ACMT) on all weapons they are
to fire during the competition. In addition, and where applicable they must have also
passed the appropriate operational fitness tests for their role. It is the responsibility of
the organising unit to promulgate the eligibility criteria within a suitable time frame in
order to allow competitors to meet the standards.
1325. Team Composition. Each team member must be assigned to a unit on a unit
PID, temporary or attached personnel are not eligible. The composition of each team
is the decision of the organising unit and will be included in a Calling Notice and/or
Administrative Instruction.
1326. Team Captains. Whilst not mandatory, it is advisable to insist on the
appointment of a Team Captain for each participating team. The Team Captain
provides a focal point for planners and can deal with administrative and managerial
issues.
1327. Coaching. Whilst the decision on whether or not to allow coaching and to
what degree lies with the organising unit, the following detail is a guide:
a. Coaching is the giving or receiving from any other person any assistance
or advice, including any indication as to how the time is passing, from the
start of a practice until the score is known. In individual assessments casual
conversation between competitors on the firing point may be considered as
coaching and may lead to penalties being imposed on both parties.
b. Unless allowed in assessment conditions, coaching is NOT permitted in
any individual assessment, including during the firing of sighting shots.
c. Coaching is permitted in team assessments by members of the team,
the team captain, or team coach if one is permitted. The team captain or
coach is allowed to move about the firing point in the execution of their duties,
but must not screen competitors from wind or light.
13-5
13-6
Mobile Communication
1337. Personal communication devices, including mobile telephones and/or walkie
talkie type radios, are not to be used for unauthorised communication between
the Firing Points and Butts. Once a firer enters the marshalling process he/she is
forbidden from using any form of mobile communications until such time as he/she is
marshalled from the firing point.
Excess Hits
1338. Marking. When, in any practice or series of practices, the total number of hits
on a competitors target or targets exceeds the number of shots fired and when there
are no means of identifying these shots, the procedure will be as follows:
a. If it can be proved that the excess hits in any phase or practice were
made by the competitor or team firing more than the number of shots allowed,
the score will be disallowed and the penalty may be disqualification.
b. When the number of excess hits does not exceed one half of the
number of shots allowed, the score will be adjusted by cancelling first a hit of
the LOWEST value, then a hit of the HIGHEST value and so on alternately
until the hits left are equal to the shots permitted to be fired in that practice.
c. When the number of excess hits exceeds one half of the number of
shots allowed, the score will be cancelled and the competitor will re-shoot.
New scores will be given for spoilt targets only, all other practices will stand.
d. When different targets are used at different times, during a practice, the
score made on the target without excess hits will stand, and the above rules
will only apply to a target with excess hits.
e. If firing point staff observe a competitor firing on another competitors
target he is to be informed immediately that he is cross firing. No allowance
will be made for shots cross fired, and no additional penalty will be applied.
f.
SARTS Only. In cases of excess rounds during points per hit
competitions. The competitors target with excess rounds on will be examined
by the RCO. If the excess rounds are over 50% of the total fired the competitor
must re shoot. If under 50% the firer is given the benefit of doubt. All hit shots
to a maximum of the HPS are counted. Missed shots should not be counted.
If different scoring areas are being used the rule for excess hits for manual
scoring should be applied.
13-7
13-8
e. Once challenges have been dealt with, or if there are no challenges, the
RCO will order the butts to patch out.
1345. Spotting Discs. Only the regulation orange spotting discs will be used.
Colour blind competitors may request for their spotting discs to be reversed so that
the white side is shown. No spotting discs will be put in the shot holes until the score
has been taken. No shot holes will be pasted over or partially patched out until the
order to patch out is given.
1346. SARTS. For deliberate and timed practices the scoring procedure is as
follows:
a.
At the end of the practice or shoot, the RCO will ask for any protests.
b. Once protests have been dealt with or if there are no protests the
RCO will order the console operator to read out the scores. The console
operator will read out the number of hits by ranges or the total number of hits
in each lane. Once this has been done, the RCO will ask for any questions.
A competitor may ask for his score to be read out again. Scores recorded on
the console may not be challenged. Once the assessment is complete a butt
register will be printed out and signed by the firers.
c. If a competitor believes their lane is malfunctioning, it is to be brought
to the attention of the RCO. The RCO may, at his/her discretion, interrogate
SARTS to see if shots have been captured accurately. The RCO may
compare previous and later shoots on the lane in question. If the lane is
working correctly the score will stand. If any doubt exists, a re-shoot is to
be awarded and the lane will not be used until it has been investigated by a
qualified engineer.
d. The use of tough books may impact on time and therefore the decision
to use them is at the discretion of the Planning Officer, who should consider
the total number of firers and associated practices before making the decision.
Close Quarter Battle Style Scoring
1347. The RCO and his staff will go to the targets and record the number of hits.
This process will be witnessed by the firer. Range staff will order that no one touches
the target until they have evaluated the score, it has been agreed by the Team Captain
or individual competitor and has been recorded.
1348. As an alternative, competitors may be required to score for each other. In this
case, competitors will work in twos or threes. If working in threes, one competitor will
check the target, whilst another competitor records the number of hits. The firer will be
asked to agree or disagree. In case of doubt or disagreement the RCO will be called
to give a decision which will be final.
13-9
1351. Non-Scoring Area. A hit on the non-scoring area, i.e. outside the border of
the target will be signalled with a spotting disc, but without score.
Penalties
1352. General. Any competitor who is reported to the SPO for dangerous or
discreditable conduct on the ranges or in camp may be ordered, if the occurrence is
proved to the satisfaction of the SPO, to forfeit all entrance fees and prizes and/or to
be disqualified from the current and/or any future competition.
Procedure
1353. Warning. A member of the Range Team should warn a competitor who
appears to be about to break a rule, or is breaking a rule. This may occur at any stage
during an assessment. Depending on the infringement a penalty may be applied by
the RCO. In this instance, a competitor cannot protest about being disturbed by a
member of the Range Team.
1354. Dangerous Practice. For any dangerous practice, the firer will be immediately
stopped (except at discretion of the RCO during a fire and movement practice) and
ordered to unload. During a fire and movement practice the firer will NOT normally
be stopped until the detail stops at the next firing point. The penalty is disqualification
for that phase, practice or assessment, or in very bad cases from the whole meeting.
13-10
Disqualification
1355. All recommendations for disqualification will be referred by the RCOs to the
SPO who will confirm or reject the disqualification or impose a lesser penalty.
1356. Negligent Discharge. A negligent discharge is defined as any round fired
accidentally, unless it is fired at or in the direction of the target after the order Watch
and shoot has been given and before the order Unload has been given. If the
circumstances are such that the negligent discharge was due to any dangerous
practice, for example careless handling, the competitor will be reported to the SPO. In
the event of a negligent discharge, the competitor will invariably be disqualified from
the assessment, and a report forwarded to his unit. In all cases the Armourers report
is final. In the event of a negligent discharge, the weapon involved is to be removed
from the firer and handed to the Armourer by a member of the range staff.
Forfeiture and Deduction of Points
1357. The RCO and SPO are empowered to award a forfeiture of up to one fifth
of the HPS which could be made by an Individual or team in the practice or phase
(if this is possible) concerned, instead of disqualification, when they consider that
disqualification would be too harsh a penalty.
Illegal Modification of Weapon
1358. The RCO and/or the SPO has the authority to have a weapon inspected by
the Armourer at any time after a competitor has fired:
a. If any illegal modification is found, the score made in that assessment
will be disallowed. Further, the Armourer is to prepare a neglect, misuse and
damage report on AFN 9268 and forward it to the firers Commanding Officer.
The weapon is not to be used again until rectified.
b. If, on inspection, there is no illegal modification the firer may re-zero the
weapon and, where necessary, shoot any practices lost.
c. In the event of illegal weapon modifications being found by the Armourer
in the normal course of his duties, an AFN 9268 is to be forwarded to the
firers Commanding Officer. The weapon is not to be used until the illegal
modification has been rectified.
Weapon Breakages
1359. The OSC administrative instruction/calling notice should detail the criteria for
weapon breakage re-shoots. In the event of a breakage during an assessment, the
competitor is to inform a member of the Range Team who will summons to Armourer.
Subject to confirmation from the appointed OSC Armourer, the following breakages
during an assessment will warrant a reshoot:
a.
13-12
1368. SARTS Suppression Triple Fig 11. The target consists of one Fig 11. A shot
that touches or is inside the 240 mm circle scores 5. A shot anywhere else on the Fig
11 scores 4 and anywhere else within a 1.22 metre circle from the centre of the target
scores 2.
1369. Fig 21 CQM Target. A standard Fig 21 CQM target using the scoring areas
to the body and head. Scoring is 5 inside the inner body area, 4 inside the outer body
area and on the remainder of the target, including the head 3 unless stated otherwise
in assessment conditions.
1370. Fig 22 CQM Target. A standard Fig 22 CQM target using the scoring areas
to the body and head. Scoring at 25, 20, 15 and 10m is 5 inside the inner body area,
4 inside the outer body area and 3 on the remainder of the target.
1371. Fig 26 CQM Target. A blank Fig 11 target with 8 x 185 mm black circles.
Scoring 5 if within or touching the nominated circle.
1372. Fig 27 CQM Target. A blank fig 11 target with 15 x 130 mm black circles.
Scoring 5 if within or touching the nominated circle.
1373. Fig 28 CQM Target. Scoring 5 inside the nominated coloured/numbered
circle.
Timing
1374. Where automated systems are not used, a stop-watch is to be used for the
timing of exposures or the duration of firing.
1375. Whenever possible, target exposures for rapid, snap and fire with movement
practices are to be timed by the IC Butts. When timing is carried out at the firing point,
and there is no mechanical means available a whistle is to be sounded as the signal
to indicate the time limit (except when stated otherwise in the assessment conditions).
1376. Timed Exposures. In a timed exposure the raising and lowering of targets is
to be carried out as quickly as possible. They are to be exposed straight up and down,
and are not to be twisted or turned . In all types of practices the exposure will be timed
from the moment the slowest target is up and stationary until the time the order is
given to lower the target. Targets exposed on a gallery range must be kept completely
below the mantlet until the order to expose is given. No verbal indication as to how the
time is passing is allowed.
13-13
Fig 11
Fig 14
13-14
Fig 12
Fig 12c
Triple Fig 11
Fig 22 CQM
Fig 21 CQM
Fig 26 CQM
Fig 27 CQM
Fig 28 CQM
13-15
13-16
b.
c.
Binoculars.
d.
Stopwatch.
e.
f.
1392. Procedures for each assessment are as per the published conditions. Efficient
communications with the butts is essential and the procedures are to be rehearsed
thoroughly.
13-17
Squadding Cards
1393. When the decision has been made to employ squadding cards, careful
handling is essential to the smooth running of the OSC. The following points must be
kept in mind:
a. The Marshal is to ensure that the Rank, Name, Initials and Unit are
entered on each card.
b. The number of hits is to be entered in ink or ballpoint. Any alterations
are to be made clearly and initialled. Competitors and/or Team Captains are
to be given an opportunity to see their cards before the scores are cancelled
on the SARTS range or the targets patched out on the Gallery Range. No
alterations can be made to the number of hits recorded on the squadding
card once scores have been cancelled or targets patched out.
c. The RCO is to check and sign the card. Arithmetic should also be
checked by Stats or Marker.
d. Once the last detail for the period has been completed, attach a last
detail card to the bundle and ensure that all cards are dispatched to Stats.
Ammunition
1394. Detailed instructions regarding the handling of ammunition are issued
separately. RCOs are responsible for the following:
a. The ammunition point must be inside the firing point enclosure and
is to be closely supervised by the Marshal. In the absence of a Marshal
the ammunition point is to be located next to the RCOs table and is to be
supervised by the RCO or an assistant.
b. Checking the stock of ammunition to ensure it matches the voucher in
the possession of the ammunition point staff.
c. Ensuring that the ammunition point staff understand that they are not to
issue ammunition without express permission of the RCO.
d. Careful handling of ammunition to ensure that it reaches the competitor
in the best possible condition
e. Ensuring that un-fired rounds are collected from the competitors before
they are allowed to leave the firing point.
f.
Ensuring that all empty cases are collected and handed in by
competitors.
13-18
CHAPTER 14
ADVANCED OPERATIONAL MARKSMANSHIP
ASSESSMENTS
Scope
1401. This chapter includes a number
of advanced operational marksmanship
assessments designed to measure and
validate
operational
marksmanship
standards in a variety of conditions.
CONTENTS
SCOPE 14-1
LF ASSESSMENTS
14-1
DRESS AND EQUIPMENT
14-2
SARTS SCORING
14-2
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
14-2
14-3
1416. Standards. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS
at each firing distance (see table below). Failure to achieve the total OMS requirement
will constitute failure of the assessment. Due to the nature of the assessment individual
practices may be fired again.
Ser
Practice
Total
Rounds
% Hits
Score
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
Practice 1
10
60%
30
50
Practice 2
10
60%
30
50
Practice 3
10
60%
30
50
Practice 4
10
60%
30
50
120
200
Pass
OMS Requirement
Assessment Details
Practice 1.
Range/Positioning
500m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-4
Practice 2.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
500m Triple Fig 11 or SARTS suppression Fig 11.
400m Triple Fig 11 or SARTS suppression Fig 11.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3.
Range/Positioning
200m Kneeling or Squatting for first exposure, prone for the second
exposure.
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Fig 11.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-5
Practice 4.
Range/Positioning
300m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 12.
10 x 3 second exposures over 4 minutes.
Order Load, ready, adopt the prone position, watch and shoot.
On the appearance of the targets firers are to engage each exposure
with 1 round. Targets Fall when Hit.
Post practice order.
Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear (once clear) ease
springs, pick up brass, move back to 500m and await scores.
Range
Target Frame
500m
500m-400m
Triple Fig 11
(SARTS suppression
Fig 11) Up and Hold
Triple
Fig
11(SARTS
suppression Fig 11)
Up and Hold
14-6
300m-100m
Fig 12
Up and Hold
200m
300m
1 x Fig 11
1 x Fig 12
Up and Hold
Fig 12.
Fall when Hit
Timings
Up
Down
05
1.06
05
36
21
1.22
1.37
2.38
3.39
05
35
2.23
3.24
4.25
26
51
05
30
1.05
1.35
2.10
2.25
2.40
2.59
3.20
3.54
09
34
1.09
1.39
2.14
2.29
2.44
3.03
3.24
3.58
Practice
Total
Rounds
% Hits
Score
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
Practice 1
10
60%
24
40
Practice 2
10
60%
24
40
Practice 3
10
60%
24
40
Practice 4
10
60%
24
40
96
160
Pass
OMS Requirement
14-7
Practice 1.
Range/Positioning
100m-300m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Order Load, adopt the standing alert position, watch out. When
targets appear firers are to run to the firing point, adopt the prone
position, make ready and open fire with one round at each exposure at
100m. Fall when hit.
3 rounds at the single exposure at 200m. Up and hold.
1 round at each exposure at 300m. Fall when hit.
Post practice order.
Make safe, dress in to the fire trench and await scores.
Practice 2.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-8
Practice 3.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
100m Fig 14.
200m Fig 12.
300m Fig 12.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-9
Range
100m
100m
100m
200m
300m
300m
300m
300m
300m
200m
300m
100m
300m
100m
200m
100m
300m
200m
200m
300m
Target Frame
Fig 14 Fall when Hit
Fig 12 Up and Hold
Fig 12 Fall when Hit
100m
200m
300m
100m
300m
200m
100m
300m
4
14-10
100m
200m
100m
200m
200m
100m
200m
100m
100m
200m
Up
05
35
44
53
1.05
1.14
1.23
1.32
05
12
18
25
30
37
42
48
53
1.00
05
14
33
42
1.01
1.10
1.29
1.38
1.57
2.06
05
20
35
52
1.15
1.33
1.47
2.05
2.20
2.38
Timings
Down
31
39
48
60
1.10
1.19
1.28
1.37
10
16
23
28
35
40
46
51
58
1.04
12
18
40
46
1.08
1.14
1.36
1.42
2.04
2.10
09
25
39
57
1.20
1.37
1.52
2.09
2.24
2.43
b.
The assessment can be conducted with the rifle, LSW and pistol.
1434. Rules
a. Firers must have zeroed their weapons and passed the ACMT for their
weapon system before the assessment is fired.
b.
14-11
1437. Scoring.
Phase 1 scoring 5, 4, 3 or 2 points per hit.
Phase 2 scoring 5, 4 or 3 points per hit.
Phase 3 scoring 5, 4 or 3 points per hit.
Phase 4 scoring 5, 4 or 3 points in the head or 3, 2 or 1 points in the body.
1438. Standards. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS
at each phase (see table below). Failure to achieve the total OMS requirement will
constitute failure of the assessment. Due to the nature of the assessment conditions
the entire shoot should be fired again.
Ser
Practice
Total
Rounds
OMS Requirement
% Hits
Score
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
Practice 1 + 2
40
60%
120
200
Practice 3 + 4
40
60%
120
200
240
400
Pass
Assessment Details
Phase 1a.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 11.
1 x 8 second exposure, followed by 4 x 3 second exposures.
3 metres behind the firing point. Order Secondary weapon system
(pistol), load, ready, return pistol. Primary weapon system, load,
ready, adopt the standing alert position, phase 1 watch out.
When targets appear firers are to advance to the 100m firing point,
adopt the standing supported position and fire two rounds at each
exposure.
Post phase 1a order.
Phase 1b, watch out.
14-12
Phase 1b.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 11.
1 x 1 second exposure, followed by 2 x 6 second exposures.
When the targets appear the firer is to move to the 75m firing point and
adopt the kneeling supported position.
On the next two exposures of the target the firer is to engage with 5
rounds per exposure.
Post phase 1b order.
Primary weapon system make safe, ready, phase 2a watch out.
Phase 2a.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Fig 14 window
(upper).
Instructions
Phase 2b.
Range/Positioning
25m Standing
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-13
Phase 3a.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 21.
2 x 5 second exposures.
On the appearance of the target the firer is to engage the target with
5 rounds from the standing position. The firer is then to adopt the
kneeling position and on the next exposure is to engage the target
with 5 rounds from the kneeling position. Firers should remain in the
kneeling position at the end of the Phase.
Post phase 3a order Make safe, Sig Sauer and GSP ready, Sig
Sauer de-cock return pistols, GSP return pistols, phase 3b watch
out.
Phase 3b.
Range/Positioning
20m Standing
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 21
1 x 1 second exposure followed by 5 x 3 second exposures.
When the target appears the firer is to move to the 20m firing point,
draw pistol and adopt the standing alert position. On the next and
subsequent exposure the firer is to engage the target with 2 rounds
from the standing position. Firers are to return to the standing alert
position after each exposure. Firers should remain in the standing
position at the end of the Phase.
Post phase 3b order Make Safe, ready, return pistols, phase 4a
watch out
Phase 4a.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-14
Fig 22.
1 x 1 second exposure followed by 2 x 4 second exposures.
When the target appears the firer is to move to the 15m firing point,
draw pistol (make ready browning) and adopt the standing alert
position. On the appearance of the target the firer is to engage with 5
rounds from the standing position. The firer should then immediately
adopt the kneeling position and engage the next exposure with a
further 5 rounds. Firers should remain in the kneeling position at the
end of the Phase.
Post phase 4a order Make Safe, ready, return pistols, phase 4b
watch out..
Phase 4b.
Range/Positioning
10m Standing
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 22.
1 x 1 second exposure followed by 5 x 3 second exposures.
When the target appears the firer is to move to the 10m firing point,
draw pistol and adopt the standing alert position
On the next 5 x exposures the firer is to engage the target with 2
rounds from the standing position.
The firer is to return to the standing alert position between exposures.
Post phase 4b order Secondary weapon systems unload, for
inspection draw pistols, show clear (once clear) ease springs
return pistols. Primary weapon systems unload, for inspection
port arms, show clear (once clear) ease springs, and await
scoring instructions.
14-15
Range
1a
100m
Fig 11
1b
75m
Fig 11
2a
50m
Fig 14 Window
(upper)
2b
25m
Fig 14 Window
(lower)
3a
25m
Fig 21
3b
20m
Fig 21
4a
15m
Fig 22
4b
10m
Fig 22
14-16
Target Frame
Timings
Up
Down
05
18
27
35
47
05
25
42
05
25
45
1.02
1.33
1.45
05
20
30
44
57
1.09
05
18
05
20
30
44
57
1.09
05
20
34
05
22
32
46
57
1.07
14
22
31
39
51
06
32
49
06
31
51
108
1.39
1.51
06
24
34
48
1.01
1.13
11
24
06
24
34
48
1.01
1.13
06
25
39
06
26
36
50
1.01
1.11
The test is a continuous fire and movement shoot fired in five phases.
1445. Rules.
a. Firers must have zeroed their weapons and passed the ACMT for their
weapon system before the assessment is fired.
b. Only one shot is to be fired at each Fall when Hit exposure in Phases
1, 2 and 3. Any unfired rounds may not be fired during subsequent phases.
1446. Ammunition. 40 rounds per firer, in one magazine of 20 rounds and two
magazines of 10 rounds.
1447. Targetry. Each lane will require:
2 x Fig 12.
1448. Scoring. Four point per hit.
1449. Standards. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS
for each phase (see table below). Failure to achieve the total OMS require- ment will
constitute failure of the assessment. Due to the nature of the assessment conditions
the entire shoot should be fired again.
14-17
OMS Requirement
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
Ser
Practice
Total
Rounds
% Hits
Score
Phase 1
500m
3 mins
3 mins
Phase 2
10
60%
24
40
Phase 3
10
60%
24
40
Phase 4
10
60%
24
40
Phase 5
10
60%
24
40
120
200
Pass
500m Run
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Firers are to have all equipment for the assessment including ammo.
On the command Go firers have 3 minutes to run 500m, plus up to 1
minute to arrive at the 500m firing point and adopt the prone position.
At the 500m firing point. Order Load, phase 2 watch out.
Phase 2.
Range/Positioning
400m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-18
Fig 12.
1 x 40 second Exposure followed by 9 x 3 second Exposures.
On the appearance of the target firers have 40 seconds to advance to
the 400m firing point, adopt the prone position, make ready and fire 1
round at each exposure. Targets Fall When Hit.
Post practice order.
Phase 3 watch out.
Phase 3.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 12.
1 x 40 second Exposure followed 2 seconds later by 1 1 x 4 second
exposure.
This is followed by four double exposures of the left and right Fig 12 in
that order.
Each exposure is for 4 seconds with 2 seconds between each
exposure.
On the appearance of the target firers have 40 seconds to advance to
the 300m firing point dress in to the fire trench and open fire.
There will be a further 9 x 4 second exposures.
Firers are to fire one round at each exposure.
Targets Fall When Hit.
Post practice order.
Phase 4, watch out.
Phase 4.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 12.
1 x 1 second exposure followed 30 seconds later by 10 x 4 second
exposures.
The appearance of the target for 1 second is the signal for firers to
advance to the 200m firing point and adopt the standing alert position.
There will be 10 x 4 second exposures.
At each exposure firers are to adopt the standing/kneeling/ squatting
position and engage the target, returning to the standing alert position
between exposures. Targets Fall When Hit.
Post practice order.
Phase 5, watch out.
Phase 5.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Fig 12
Target/ Exposure
14-19
Instructions
The appearance of the target for 1 second is the signal for firers to
advance to the 100m firing point and adopt the kneeling or squatting
position.
There will be 5 x 5 second exposures, at each exposure firers are to
adopt the standing position and fire 2 rounds, returning to the kneeling/
squatting position between exposures.
Targets up and hold.
Post phase order.
Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear (once clear) ease
springs, pick up brass, return to the 500m firing point and await
scores.
Range
500m Run
400m
Target Frame
Down
05
47
1.00
1.08
2.00
2.15
2.40
3.50
4.30
4.57
46
51
1.04
1.12
2.04
2.19
2.44
3.54
4.34
5.01
Run
Move to firing point
(re-set watch)
Fig 12
Tgt 1 (R)
Tgt 2 (L)
Tgt 1
Tgt 2
Tgt 2
Tgt 1
Tgt 2
Tgt 1
Tgt 1
Tgt 2
Fall When Hit
14-20
Timings
Up
Practice
Range
300m
Target Frame
200m
100m
04
47
54
1.01
1.08
1.15
1.22
1.29
1.36
1.43
45
52
59
1.06
1.13
1.20
1.27
1.34
1.41
1.48
25
55
1.09
1.20
1.40
2.04
2.22
2.36
2.59
3.18
3.40
26
1.00
1.14
1.25
1.45
2.09
2.27
2.41
3.04
3.23
3.45
05
40
51
1.16
1.30
1.50
07
46
57
1.22
1.36
1.56
Down
Fig 12
Tgt 1
Tgt 2
Tgt 1
Tgt 2
Tgt 1
Tgt 2
Tgt 1
Tgt 2
Tgt 1
Tgt 2
Timings
Up
14-21
b.
1457. Ammunition. 40 rounds per firer, in one magazine of 24 rounds and one
magazines of 16 rounds.
1458. Targetry and Scoring. There is no SARTS scoring solution for fig 20s on
this shoot. A single Fig 11 target is to be used scoring 5 within the 160mm circle, 4
within the 300mm circle and 3 anywhere else on the target.A SARTS solution maybe
available in the future.
1459. Standards. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS
(see table below). Failure to achieve the total OMS requirement will constitute failure
of the assessment. Due to the nature of the assessment conditions the entire shoot
should be fired again.
Ser
Practice
Total
Rounds
% Hits
Score
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
Phase 1
24
60%
72
120
Phase 2
60%
24
40
Phase 3
60%
24
40
60%
120
200
Total
OMS Requirement
e.
Assessment Details
Phase 1.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
24 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 11
6 double exposures (50% slow / 50% fast in random order).
An initial exposure of the target will initiate the contact.
Targets are only exposed once firers are in position and the RCO has
signalled to the target operator for the next double exposure..
3m to the rear of the left piece of cover.
Order Load, ready.
On the appearance of the target the firer is to double forward and take
cover. The firer will then receive 2 exposures of the Fig 20 and is to fire
2 rounds at the leading target for each exposure.
After each second exposure the firer is to apply the safety catch and
move to the next piece of cover.
On completion of the last exposure the firer is to apply the safety catch
and await further orders.
Post practice order Move to the left side of the wall, fix bayonets,
phase 2, advance.
Phase 2.
Range/Positioning
90m
80m
70m
60m
Standing
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 11
4 exposures (two fast and two slow) in random order.
Targets should be exposed during the advance on signal from the
RCO.
There will be 4 exposures of the target during the advance. Firers are
to fire 2 rounds at the leading target during each exposure from the
standing position.
Firers will be ordered to advance after each exposure.
Post practice order Move to the 50m firing point, phase 3 watch
and shoot.
14-23
Range
100m
Target Frame
Fig 11
First target. (non
firing)
Run
When in
place
Fast
Slow
Slow
Fast
Slow
Fast
Fast
Slow
Fast
Slow
Slow
Fast
ON COMMAND
FROM RCO.
Once firers are in
position.
Slow Speed 2
Fast Speed 3
90m
80m
70m
60m
50m
Fig 11
ON COMMAND
FROM RCO,
Slow Speed 2
Fast Speed 3
Fig 11
Slow Speed 2
Fast Speed 3
14-24
Fast
When in
place
When in
place
Fast
Slow
Slow
Fast
Slow
Fast
Fast
Slow
14-25
Ser
Practice
Total
Rounds
OMS Requirement
% Hits
Score
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
Phase 1
30
60%
72
120
Phase 2
10
60%
24
40
Phase 3
10
60%
24
40
120
200
Total
Assessment Details
Phase 1a.
Range/Positioning
100m
200m
300m
Prone.
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-26
Phase 1b.
Range/Positioning
300m
200m
Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Phase 2.
Range/Positioning
300m
200m
100m
Kneeling Supported.
Ammunition
10 Rounds
100m Fig 14.
200m Fig 12.
300m Fig 12.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-27
Phase 3.
Range/Positioning
300m
200m
Sitting
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-28
Range
1a
100
200
300
300
200
200
300
200
300
300
200
200
300
300
300
200
100
300
200
100
300
200
100
300
200
300
200
300
200
300
200
300
200
1b
Target Frame
Fig 14 Fig 12
Up and Hold
Fig 12
Fall when Hit
Fig 12
Fall when Hit
Timings
Up
Down
05
33
46
1.27
2.37
2.45
3.43
4.31
5.39
5.47
6.40
7.28
8.41
05
26
34
42
1.05
1.13
1.21
1.39
1.47
1.55
05
11
20
26
45
51
1.15
1.21
1.35
1.41
31
44
1.12
1.31
2.41
2.49
3.47
4.35
5.43
5.51
6.44
7.32
8.45
12
29
37
45
1.08
1.16
1.24
1.42
1.50
1.58
09
15
24
30
49
55
1.19
1.25
1.39
1.45
14-29
14-30
Ser
Practice
Total
Rounds
OMS Requirement
% Hits
Score
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
Sighting
Non Scoring
Practice 1
10
60%
30
50
Assessment Details
Practice - Sighting shots
Range/Positioning
100m Standing
Ammunition
4 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 11
There will be 4 x runs for sighting shots. 2 x slow and 2 x fast
Order Load, ready, adopt the standing alert position, watch and
shoot.
When targets appear firers are to open fire with one round per
exposure.
After 4 runs order Apply safety catches Show results on SARTS.
Once complete order Adopt the standing alert position, Watch and
shoot
Practice 1.
Range/Positioning
100m Standing
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 11
There will be 10 x runs, 5 x fast and 5 x slow in random order.
When the target appears firers are to open fire with one round per
exposure. After the last run order unload for inspection port arms
(once clear) ease springs, pick up the brass await scores
Give scores
14-31
Range
100
Target Frame
Fig 11
L to R or R to L
100
Slow Speed 2
Fast Speed 3
Fig 11
L to R or R to L
Slow Speed 2
Fast Speed 3
14-32
Timings
Up
Over 1
minute
Over 2-3 mi
nutes
Down
Slow
Slow
Fast
Fast
Slow
Fast
Fast
Slow
Fast
Slow
Slow
Fast
Fast
Slow
Practice
Total
Rounds
% Hits
Score
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
Practice 1
10
60%
30
50
Practice 2
10
60%
30
50
Practice 3
10
60%
30
50
Practice 4
10
60%
30
50
120
200
Pass
OMS Requirement
14-33
Assessment Details
Practice 1.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
500m Prone
10
Rounds
Triple Fig 11 or SARTS suppression Fig 11.
1 x 60 second exposure.
Order Load, ready, adopt the standing alert position, practice 1
watch out. On the appearance of the targets
firers are to adopt the prone position open fire with 10 rounds. Targets
Up and Hold.
Post practice order.
Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear (once clear) ease
springs, pick up brass and await scores.
Practice 2.
Range/Positioning
500 300m
Run down
500m Prone 400m Sitting, kneeling or squatting
300m prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Triple Fig 11 or SARTS suppression fig 11 at 500m and 400m.
Fig 12 at 300m.
1 x exposure of 15 seconds at 500m.
Target/ Exposure
14-34
Instructions
Practice 3.
Range/Positioning
300m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Triple Fig 11 or SARTS virtual triple Fig 11.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-35
Range
Target Frame
500m
500m and
400m
300m
14-36
300m
400m
Fig 12
Up and Hold
1 x Fig 11
1x Fig 12
Up and Hold
Triple Fig 11(SARTS
suppression Fig 11)
Up and Hold
Up
05
Timings
Down
1.06
05
31
1.02
1.13
1.30
21
32
1.09
1.20
1.31
2.02
2.13
05
29
2.09
2.20
21
45
05
28
45
55
1.06
21
34
51
1.01
1.12
Practice
Total
Rounds
% Hits
Score
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
Practice 1
10
60%
30
50
Practice 2
10
60%
30
50
Practice 3
10
60%
30
50
Practice 4
10
60%
30
50
Practice 5
10
60%
Pass
OMS Requirement
30
50
150
250
14-37
Assessment Details
Practice 1.
Range/Positioning
300m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 12
1 x 60 second exposure
3 metres behind the firing point Order Load, ready, adopt the
standing alert position, practice 1 watch out.
On the appearance of the target firers are to move onto the firing point,
adopt the prone position and engage with 10 rounds. Targets Up and
Hold.
Order.
Post practice order.
Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear (once clear) ease
springs, pick up brass and await scores.
Practice 2.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Fig 12
1 x exposure of 15 seconds at 300m.
Target/ Exposure
14-38
Instructions
Practice 3.
Range/Positioning
100m Standing
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 12c
5 x double exposures of 3 seconds with 2 seconds between each
exposure.
There will be irregular intervals between double exposures.
Order Load, ready, adopt the standing alert position, practice 3
watch and shoot.
On the appearance of the target firers are to engage the first exposure
from the standing position then immediately adopt the kneeling or
squatting position and engage the second exposure. Firers are to
return to the standing alert position after each double exposure.
Targets Up and Hold.
Post practice order.
Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear (once clear) ease
springs, pick up brass, move back to 200m and await scores.
14-39
Practice 4.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 12.
2 x 15 second exposures with an interval of 8 seconds.
Order Load, ready, adopt the standing alert position, practice 4
watch out.
On the appearance of the target firers are to adopt the sitting, kneeling
or squatting position and engage each exposure with 5 rounds.
Targets Up and Hold.
Post practice order.
Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear (once clear) ease
springs, pick up brass, move back to 300m and await scores.
Practice 5.
Range/Positioning
300m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-40
Fig 12.
10 x 3 second exposures with irregular intervals.
Order Load, ready, adopt the prone position, practice 5 watch
and shoot.
Firers are to engage each exposure with one round.
Targets Up and Hold.
Post practice order.
Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear (once clear) ease
springs, pick up brass, and await scores.
Range
300m
300m
100m
100m
200m
300m
Target Frame
Figure 12
Up and Hold
Figure 12
Up and Hold
Figure 12c
Up and Hold
Figure 12
Up and Hold
Timings
Up
Down
05
1.06
05
31
1.03
1.21
1.39
2.11
2.29
05
11
23
29
1.00
1.06
1.15
1.21
1.52
1.58
05
29
05
40
1.10
1.40
2.30
3.05
3.30
4.10
4.45
4. 56
21
32
1.10
1.28
1.40
2.18
2.36
09
15
27
33
1.04
1.10
1.19
1.25
1.56
2.02
21
45
09
44
1.14
1.44
2.34
3.09
3.34
4.14
4.49
5. 00
14-41
14110. Rules.
a. Firers must have zeroed their weapon and passed the ACMT for their
weapon system before the assessment is fired.
b. Only the number of shots permitted can be fired at each exposure.
Rounds can not be carried forward into the next practice.
14111. Ammunition. 40 rounds of 9mm Ball in four magazines of 10 rounds.
14112. Targetry. Each lane will require:
2 x Fig 21 CQM targets at 25m and 20m
1 x Fig 28 or 27 CQM target at 15m
1 x Fig 22 CQM target at 10m
14113. Scoring.
Practice 1 & 2 scoring 5, 4 or 3 points per hit.
Practice 3 scoring 5 points for each correct shape or circle hit. A maximum of
2 shots on each shape or circle will score.
Practice 4 scoring 5, 4 or 3 points in the head or 3, 2 or 1 point in the body.
14114. Standards. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS
at each phase (see table below). Failure to achieve the total OMS requirement will
constitute failure of the assessment. Due to the nature of the assessment conditions
the entire shoot should be fired again.
14-42
Ser
Phase
Total
Rounds
OMS Requirement
% Hits
Score
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
Phase 1
10
60%
30
50
Phase 2
10
60%
30
50
Phase 3
10
60%
30
50
Phase 4
10
60%
30
50
120
200
Pass
Assessment Details
Phase 1. Accelerated Fire
Range/Positioning
25m Standing
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Fig 21.
Target No 1.
Instructions
20m Standing.
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Fig 21.
Target No 2.
Instructions
14-43
15m Standing
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Fig 28 or 27.
Target No 3.
Instructions
5 x 2 second exposures.
Order Draw pistols, adopt the standing alert position, target
number 3, watch and shoot.
Targets exposed on orders from RCO.
Blue circle, number 5, 1 A (black dots) etc
During each exposure firers are to fire two shots at each shape,
number or circle as indicated by The RCO.
Targets Up and Hold.
Post practice order.
Make safe, ready, return pistols, advance to 10m.
Phase 4. CQM
Range/Positioning
10m Standing
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Fig 22.
Target No 4.
Instructions
14-44
Range
25m
20m
15m
10m
Target Frame
Target No 1
Fig 21
Target No 2
Fig 21
Target No 3
Fig 28/27
Target No 4
Fig 21
Timings
Up
Down
05
12
16
23
05
09
15
19
31
35
46
50
55
59
On command
From RCO
08
11
22
25
31
34
35
38
46
49
14-45
14-46
Assessment Details
Practice 1.
Range/Positioning
200m Prone
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-47
14-48
a.
If butts are not cleared no points are awarded for returned ammunition.
Time for
All Targets Hit
Points
25 seconds or less
500
26 30 seconds
490
31 - 35 seconds
480
36 40 seconds
470
41 45 seconds
460
46 50 seconds
450
51 55 seconds
440
56 60 seconds
430
61 65 seconds
420
66 70 seconds
410
71 75 seconds
400
No of Rounds
Returned
No of Rounds
x5
Team Score
(b) + (d)
b. Column (a) is the scoring guide start point. Once the time for all targets
hit has been identified, move across the respective row until a final score has
been identified and column (e) has been completed.
c.
14133. Standards. To achieve the required standard the team must achieve the OMS
at each firing distance (see table below). Failure to achieve the total OMS requirement
will constitute failure of the assessment. Due to the nature of the assessment individual
phases may be fired again.
Ser
Practice
1
300m
2
200m
2
Pass
Total
Rounds
OMS Requirement
% Hits
Score
10
60%
405
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
675
10
60%
120
200
525
875
14-49
e.
Assessment Details
Practice 1.
Range/Positioning
300m Prone
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 12.
A target appears every 5 seconds. Each target is with- drawn when
hit. A fresh target can only be exposed if 1 or more targets remain
exposed. Targets will appear from the left and be exposed in sequential
order.
400m firing point.
Order Load, adopt the prone position, watch out.
When the first target appears the fire team is to run to the 300m firing
point navigating obstacles as described in the notes. Adopt the prone
position, make ready and engage exposed targets. Targets Fall when
Hit.
Post practice order.
Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear, (once clear) ease
springs.
Range staff will collect and count unfired ammunition and calculate
scores for phase 1.
Pick up brass and return to the 400m firing point or marshalling
area
Or send immediately to phase 2.
14-50
Range
Target Frame
300m
15 x Fig 12
1 metre apart
200m
Fig 12
Fig 11
Fig 11
Fig 12
Fig 12
Fig 11
Fig 12
Fig 11
Fig 11
Fig 12
Timings
Up
Down
0
05
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
1.00
1.05
1.10
1.15
Fall
When
Hit
05
20
32
50
1.00
1.19
1.26
1.54
2.10
2.20
1.20 - All
Tgts Down
10
24
36
55
1.05
1.23
1.31
1.58
2.14
2.25
14-51
Practice
1
(100 to 25m)
OMS Requirement
Total
Rounds
% Hits
Score
160
60%
480
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
800
14-52
c.
100m to 25m
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Fig 11
Instructions
3m behind the 100m firing point. Order Load, ready, adopt the
kneeling position, watch out.
Practice 1 (Continued).
Range/Positioning
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Standing Supported
EXPOSURE 1
Left Fig 11
1 x 15 second exposure in lanes 1 and 2.
10 seconds after the command Watch Out there will be a 15 second
exposure of the Fig 11 target in lanes 1 and 2. The firers are to move
onto the 100m firing point and engage their own target with a maximum
of 10 rounds.
Practice 1 (Continued).
Range/Positioning
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Standing Supported
EXPOSURE 2
Left Fig 11
1 x 15 second exposure in lanes 4 and 5.
Immediately on completion of exposure 1 there will be a 15 second
exposure of the Fig 11 target in lanes 4 and 5. The firers are to move
onto the 100m firing point and engage their own target with a maximum
of 10 rounds.
Practice 1 (Continued).
Range/Positioning
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Kneeling Supported
EXPOSURE 3
2nd Left Fig 11
1 x 20 second exposure for lanes 1 and 2.
Immediately on completion of exposure 2 there will be a 20 second
exposure of the Fig 11 target in lanes 1 and 2. The firers are to move
onto the 75m firing point and engage their own target with a maximum
of 10 rounds.
14-53
Practice 1 (Continued).
Range/Positioning
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Kneeling Supported
EXPOSURE 4
2nd Left Fig 11
1 x 20 second exposure for lanes 4 and 5.
Immediately on completion of exposure 3 there will be a 20 second
exposure of the Fig 11 target in lanes 4 and 5. The firers are to move
onto the 75m firing point and engage their own target with a maximum
of 10 rounds.
Practice 1 (Continued).
Range/Positioning
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Kneeling or Squatting
EXPOSURE 5
2nd Right Fig 11
1 x 20 second exposure for lanes 1 and 2.
Immediately on completion of exposure 4 there will be a 20 second
exposure of the Fig 11 target in lanes 1 and 2. The firers are to move
onto the 50m firing point and engage their own target with a maximum
of 10 rounds.
Practice 1 (Continued).
Range/Positioning
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Kneeling or Squatting
EXPOSURE 6
2nd Right Fig 11
1 x 20 second exposure for lanes 4 and 5.
Immediately on completion of exposure 5 there will be a 20 second
exposure of the Fig 11 target in lanes 4 and 5. The firers are to move
onto the 50m firing point and engage their own target with a maximum
of 10 rounds.
Practice 1 (Continued).
Range/Positioning
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-54
Standing
EXPOSURE 7
Right Fig 11
1 x 20 second exposure for lanes 1 and 2.
Immediately on completion of exposure 6 there will be a 20 second
exposure of the Fig 11 target in lanes 1 and 2. The firers are to move
onto the 25m firing point and engage their own target with a maximum
of 10 rounds.
Practice 1 (Continued).
Range/Positioning
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Standing
EXPOSURE 8
Right Fig 11
1 x 20 second exposure for lanes 4 and 5.
Immediately on completion of exposure 7 there will be a 20 second
exposure of the Fig 11 target in lanes 4 and 5. The firers are to move
onto the 25m firing point and engage their own target with a maximum
of 10 rounds.
Post practice order.
Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear, (once clear) ease
springs
Under control of the range staff move forward and take scores.
Range
Target Frame
100m
1 and 2
4 and 5
1 and 2
4 and 5
1 and 2
4 and 5
1 and 2
4 and 5
75m
50m
25m
Timings
Up
Down
10
26
42
1.03
1.24
1.45
2.06
2.27
26
42
1.03
1.24
1.45
2.06
2.27
2.48
14-55
b.
2 x Riflemen.Lane 1, 2 or 3.
c.
14151. Rules.
a. Firers must have zeroed their weapons and passed the ACMT for their
weapon system before the assessment is fired.
b. Once made ready, all movement must be conducted with safety catches
applied.
c. Any unfired rounds in any phase may not be fired during subsequent
phases.
14152. Ammunition. 50 rounds per firer in one magazine of 20 rounds and three
magazines of 10 rounds. 10 rounds will initially be issued for Phase 1 only. The
remainder will be issued when the section arrive at the HLS during Phase 2.
14153. Scoring.
a. All Phases Fig 11 and 12, 5 and 4 points per hit. Triple Fig or SARTS
suppression Fig 11, 5, 4 or 2 points per hit.
b. Phase 2. 100 points. Any member of the fire team failing to complete
the CASEVAC and ammo re-supply in the allocated time will be deemed
to have failed the assessment and the fire team will complete the shoot
without those individuals that failed phase 2. Additionally the fire team will be
deducted 25 points for each individual failure in phase 2.
14154. Standards. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS
14-56
for each phase (see table below). Failure to achieve the total OMS requirement will
constitute failure of the assessment. Due to the nature of the shoot conditions the
entire assessment should be fired again.
Ser
Phase
Total
Rounds
% Hits
Score
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
Phase 1
40
60%
120
200
Phase 2
NA
NA
NA
NA
Phase 3
40
60%
120
200
Phase 4
40
60%
120
200
Phase 5
40
60%
120
200
Phase 6
40
60%
120
200
600
1000
OMS Requirement
Pass
All Lanes
b.
All lanes.
14-57
Assessment Details
Phase 1.
Range/Positioning
300m Prone
Ammunition
10 rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
4 x Fig 12
1 exposure of 10 seconds followed by 5 x 3 second exposures with
irregular intervals.
Order Load, ready, adopt the prone position, watch and shoot.
On the appearance of the first exposure firers are to fire 5 rounds.
Firers are then to fire one round at each of the remaining five
exposures.
Targets Up and Hold
Post last exposure order Man down
Phase 2. Casevac
Range/Positioning
300m-600m
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
As soon as the targets from phase 1 go down the Fire Team have 5
minutes to recover the casualty (out of contact) to the HLS (600m FP),
conduct an ammunition re-supply and collect 3 full ammunition boxes.
At the 600m point and 5 minutes after the last exposure in phase one
order Watch out.
Phase 3.
Range/Positioning
500m Prone
Ammunition
10 rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-58
Phase 4.
Range/Positioning
400m Prone
Ammunition
10 rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Phase 5.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
4 x Fig 11
1 second flash followed 60 seconds later by 1 x 20 second exposure.
A one second exposure will be the signal for the Fire Team to move to
300m in bounds (see explanatory notes) 60 seconds later, there will be
1 x 20 second exposures of the targets which is to be engaged with 10
rounds. LSW to fire in bursts of 2-3 rounds.
Targets Up and Hold.
The Three ammunition boxes are to be left at the 300m FP.
Phase 6.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
4 x Fig 12
1 second flash followed 60 seconds later by 5 x 4 second exposures
with irregular intervals.
A one second exposure will be the signal for the Fire Team to move to
200m in bounds (see explanatory notes) 60 seconds later, there will be
5 x 4 second exposures of the targets which are to be engaged with 10
rounds. LSW to fire in bursts of 2-3 rounds.
Targets Up and Hold.
Post phase Order Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear,
(once clear) ease springs, return to 600m pick up brass and await
scores
14-59
Range
Lanes
300m
1-2-3-4
2
3
CASEVAC
Target Frame
Down
Fig 12
Up and Hold
05
20
31
43
1.01
1.16
16
24
35
47
1.05
1.20
6.25
7.27
7.43
7.59
8.13
8.26
8.48
9.50
10.03
10.15
10.27
10.39
11.00
12.02
12.39
13.41
13.55
14.04
14.20
14.30
6.26
7.35
7.51
8.06
8.21
8.33
8.49
9.58
10.10
10.22
10.34
10.46
11.01
12.23
12.40
13.47
14.00
14.09
14.25
14.35
500m
1-2-3-4
Triple Fig 11
Or SARTS
suppression
Up and Hold
400m
1-2-3-4
Triple Fig 11
Or SARTS
suppression
Up and Hold
300m
1-2-3-4
200m
1-2-3-4
Fig 11
Up and Hold
Fig 12
Up and Hold
14-60
Timings
Up
Phase
1
200m
2
100m
3
100m
2
3
Total
Rounds
OMS Requirement
% Hits
Score
40
60%
120
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
200
40
60%
120
200
40
60%
120
200
480
800
Pass
14-61
Assessment Details
Phase 1.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 11.
5 x 5 second exposure with irregular intervals.
Order Dress in to the fire trench, load, Ready, adopt the standing
supported position, watch and shoot.
On the appearance of the targets firers are to engage each exposure.
Any number of shots may be fired at each exposure. Targets Up and
Hold.
Post practice Order Dress out of the fire trench under control
of the range staff advance to 100m. Adopt the standing alert
position, watch out
Phase 2.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 12.
10 x 4 second exposure with irregular intervals.
On the appearance of the
targets firers are to adopt the kneeling or squatting position and fire
one shot at each exposure.
Firers are to return to the standing alert position after each exposure.
Targets Fall when Hit.
Post practice Order Adopt the kneeling or squatting position,
watch out
Phase 3.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-62
Fig 12.
4 x 6 second exposure with irregular intervals.
On the appearance of the target firers are to break cover by adopting
the standing position and engage each exposure. Any number of shots
may be fired at each exposure. Targets Up and Hold.
Post phase Order Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear,
(once clear) ease springs, pick up brass and await scores
Range
Target Frame
200m
Fig 11
Up and Hold
100m
Fig 12
Fall when Hit
100m
Fig 12
Up and Hold
Timings
Up
Down
05
16
30
41
55
05
21
33
46
57
1.11
1.22
1.36
1.50
2.01
05
21
34
48
11
22
36
47
1.01
10
26
38
51
1.02
1.16
1.27
1.41
1.55
2.06
12
28
41
55
14-63
b.
c.
Riflemen 20 rounds.
b.
Gunner 50 rounds.
14174. Scoring. Phase 1. Any member of the section failing to complete the Approach
March in the allocated time will be deemed to have failed the assessment and the fire
team will complete the shoot without those individuals that failed phase 1. Additionally
the section will be penalised - 50 points for each individual failure in phase 1.
a. All Phases Fig 11 and 12. 5 or 4 points per hit. Triple Fig or SARTS
suppression Fig 11 5 ,4 or 2 points per hit.
14-64
14175. Standards. To achieve the required standard the section must achieve the
OMS for each phase (see table below). Failure to achieve the total OMS requirement
will constitute failure of the assessment. Due to the nature of the shoot conditions the
entire assessment should be fired again.
Total
Rounds
% Hits
Score
Phase 1
60%
150
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
250
Phase 2
2 x 10 (20)
60%
30
50
Phase 3a
1 x 30
60%
10
Phase 3b
3 x 10
1 x 30
60%
10
Phase 4
60%
87
Gunners 145
Phase 5
60%
81
120
Riflemen 135
200
480
800
Ser
Phase
1
2
3 x 10
Remaining
from Phases
3a and 3b
10 (80)
OMS Requirement
Pass
Lane 1 - 3 -
b.
Lane 4
c.
SARTS
14-65
Assessment Details
Phase 1. Approach March
Range/Positioning
610m
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Phase 2.
Range/Positioning
600m Prone
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Phase 3a.
Range/Positioning
500m Prone
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-66
Phase 3b.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
400m Prone
Riflemen - 10 rounds
Gunners 30 rounds
2 x Triple Fig 11 Fig (SARTS suppression Fig 11) (right)
1 x 40 second exposure.
The appearance of the targets is the signal for a pair to advance to the
400m firing point and open fire. Each firer MUST only engage their own
target with up to 10 rounds.
LSW Gunner is to fire single shots.
Targets Fall when Hit
As soon as a pair open fire The remainder of the fire team can
advance to 400m and wait until the targets are exposed for phase 4.
Phase 4.
Range/Positioning
300m Prone
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-67
Phase 5.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
4x Fig 12
1 x 1 second exposure of 3 x Fig 12 followed 30 seconds later by 5 x 4
second exposures.
The appearance of a one second exposure will be the signal for the
fire team to advance to the 200m firing point. 30 seconds later there
will be 5 x 4 second exposures. Firers are to engage with 2 rounds per
exposure. LSW to fire in bursts of 2-3 rounds.
Targets Up and Hold.
Post phase Order Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear,
(once clear) ease springs, return to 600m point, pick up brass and
await scores
Range
Lanes
Target Frame
2.4km
600m
3a
500m
1-2
3b
400m
3-4
300m
1-2- 3
14-68
200m
4
1-2-3-4
Fig 12
Up and Hold
Timings
Up
Down
05
16
31
51
06
27
44
1.32
1.35
2.16
2.35
3.07
3.20
2.36
3.14
3.27
3.48
4.10
4.36
5.08
5.20
5.31
5.45
6.05
4.04
4.26
4.37
5.14
5.26
5.37
5.51
6.11
14-69
14186. Standards. To achieve the required standard the section must achieve the
OMS for each phase (see table below). Failure to achieve the total OMS requirement
will constitute failure of the assessment. Due to the nature of the shoot conditions the
entire assessment should be fired again.
Total
Rounds
% Hits
Score
Phase 1
60%
300
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
500
Phase 2
2 x 10 (20)
60%
60
100
Phase 3a
60%
12
20
Phase 3b
60%
12
20
Phase 4
60%
174
Gunners 290
Phase 5
1 x 30
3 x 10
1 x 30
3 x 10
Remaining
from Phases
3a and 3b
10 (80)
60%
162
240
Riflemen 270
400
960
1600
Ser
Phase
1
2
OMS Requirement
Pass
14-70
Lanes 1 3 & 10 - 12
Lanes 4 & 9
SARTS
Assessment Details
Phase 1. Approach March
Range/Positioning
610m
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Phase 2.
Range/Positioning
600m Prone
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Phase 3a.
Range/Positioning
500m Prone
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-71
Phase 3b.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
400m Prone
Riflemen - 10 rounds
Gunners 30 rounds
4 x Triple Fig 11 or SARTS suppression Fig 11
1 x 40 second exposure (right Fire Team)
The appearance of the targets is the signal for right Fire Team to
advance to the 400m firing point and open fire.
Each firer MUST only engage their own target with up to 10 rounds.
LSW Gunners to fire single shots.
Targets Fall when Hit
As soon as the right Fire Team open fire the left Fire Team can
advance to 400m and wait until the targets are exposed for phase 4.
Phase 4.
Range/Positioning
300m Prone
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-72
Phase 5.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Range
Lanes
Target Frame
2.4km
600m
4 and 9
3a
500m
1,2,3,4
3b
400m
9,10,11,12
300m
1,2,3,and
10, 11, 12
4 and 9
5
200m
1,2,3,4
9,10,11,12
Fig 11
Up and Hold
8 x Fig 12
Timings
Up
Down
05
16
32
51
06
27
43
1.32
1.35
2.16
2.35
3.07
3.20
2.36
3.14
3.27
3.48
4.10
4.36
5.08
5.20
5.31
5.45
6.05
4.04
4.26
4.37
5.14
5.26
5.37
5.51
6.11
14-73
All Phases Fig 11 and Fig 12, 5 and 4. Triple fig 5, 4 and 2 points per hit.
b. Phase 2 = 200 points. Any member of the section failing to complete the
CASE- VAC and ammo re-supply in the allocated time will be deemed to have
failed the assessment and the section will complete the shoot without those
individuals that failed phase 2. Additionally the section will be penalised - 50
points for each individual failure in phase 2.
14-74
14198. Standards. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS
for each phase (see table below). Failure to achieve the total OMS requirement will
constitute failure of the assessment. Due to the nature of the shoot conditions the
entire assessment should be fired again.
Ser
Phase
Total
Rounds
OMS Requirement
% Hits
Score
Phase 1
80
60%
240
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
400
Phase 2
60%
200
200
Phase 3
80
60%
240
400
Phase 4
80
60%
240
400
Phase 5
80
60%
240
400
Phase 6
80
60%
Pass
240
400
1320
2200
SARTS
Assessment Details
Phase 1.
Range/Positioning
300m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
8 x Fig 12.
1 exposure of 10 seconds followed by 5 x 3 second exposures.
Order Load, ready, watch and shoot
On the appearance of the first exposure firers are to fire 5 rounds.
Firers are then to fire one round at each of the remaining five
exposures.
Targets Up and Hold.
Post last exposure order Man down
Phase 2. Casevac
Range/Positioning
300m to 600m
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Phase 3.
Range/Positioning
500m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-76
Phase 4.
Range/Positioning
400m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Phase 5.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
8 x Fig 11.
1 second flash followed 60 seconds later by 1 x 20 second exposure.
A one second exposure will be the signal for the Section to move
to 300m in bounds. 60 seconds later, there will be 1 x 20 second
exposures of the targets which is to be engaged with 10 rounds. LSW
to fire in bursts of 2-3 rounds.
The six ammunition boxes are to be left at the 300m FP.
Targets Up and Hold.
Phase 6.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
8 x Fig 12.
1 second flash followed 60 seconds later by 5 x 4 second exposures.
A one second exposure will be the signal for the Section to move
to 200m in bounds. 60 seconds later, there will be 5 x 4 second
exposures of the targets which are to be engaged with 10 rounds. LSW
to fire in bursts of 2-3 rounds.
Targets Up and Hold.
Post phase Order Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear,
(once clear) ease springs, return to 600m pick up brass and await
scores
14-77
Range
Lanes
300m
All TGTS
2
3
CASEVAC
Target Frame
Up
Down
Fig 12
Up and Hold
05
20
31
43
1.01
1.16
16
24
35
47
1.05
1.20
6.25
7.27
7.43
7.59
8.13
8.26
8.48
9.50
10.03
10.15
10.27
10.39
11.00
12.02
12.39
13.41
13.55
14.04
14.20
14.30
6.26
7.35
7.51
8.06
8.21
8.33
8.49
9.58
10.10
10.22
10.34
10.46
11.01
12.23
12.40
13.47
14.00
14.09
14.25
14.35
500m
All TGTS
Triple Fig 11
Or SARTS
suppression
Up and Hold
400m
All TGTS
Triple Fig 11
Or SARTS
suppression
Up and Hold
300m
All TGTS
200m
All TGTS
Fig 11
Up and Hold
Fig 12
Up and Hold
14-78
Timings
14-79
14209. Standards. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS
at each firing distance (see table below). Failure to achieve the total OMS requirement
will constitute failure of the assessment. Due to the nature of the assessment individual
phases may be fired again.
Ser
Phase
1a and 1b
400m
2
300m
3
200m
4
100m
2
3
4
Total
Rounds
OMS Requirement
% Hits
Score
30
60%
90
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
150
20
60%
60
100
20
60%
60
100
10
60%
30
50
240
400
Pass
Assessment Details
Phase 1a.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-80
Phase 1b.
Range/Positioning
400m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Phase 2.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
20 Rounds
1 x Triple Fig 11 or SARTS suppression Fig 11.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
5 x 5 second exposures
On the appearance of the tar- get firers are to advance to the
300m firing point, make ready (if required) and engage the targets in
bursts of 2-3 rounds with up to 20 rounds.
Targets Up and Hold.
Post phase
Order Phase 3, watch out.
Phase 3.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1 x Fig 11.
1 exposure of 45 seconds.
On the appearance of the target firers are to advance to the 200m
firing point, make ready (if required) and open fire in bursts of 2-3
rounds with up to 20 rounds. Targets Up and Hold.
Post phase
Order Phase 4, watch out.
14-81
Phase 4.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
1 x Fig 11.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Range
1a
400m
1b
400m
300m
Triple Fig 11
Or SARTS
suppression Fig 11
Up and Hold
200m
100m
Fig 11
Up and Hold
Fig 11
Up and Hold
14-82
Target Frame
Triple Fig 11
Or SARTS
suppression Fig 11
Up and Hold
Triple Fig 11
Or SARTS
suppression Fig 11
Up and Hold
Timings
Up
Down
05
51
1.01
1.13
1.25
1.34
1.43
2.08
2.39
2.52
3.06
3.16
3.30
3.51
1.05
1.17
1.29
1.38
1.47
2.09
2.45
2.58
3.12
3.22
3.36
4.37
4.52
5.23
5.34
5.43
5.55
6.05
4.53
5.27
5.38
5.47
5.59
6.09
14216. Rules.
a.
b. Firers must have zeroed their weapons and passed the ACMT for their
weapon system before the assessment is fired.
c. A non scoring 5 round check group is to be fired before the
commencement of Practice 1.
d. Once made ready, all movement must be conducted with safety catches
applied.
e.
14217. Ammunition.
Check Zero 5 rds, Phase 1 35 rds, Phase 2 30 rds
14218. Scoring. 5 and 4 points per hit. If bonus shot 10 and 4 points per hit.
14219. Standards. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS
at each phase (see table below). Failure to achieve the total OMS requirement will
constitute failure of the Assessment. Due to the nature of the assessment conditions
the entire shoot should be fired again.
14-83
Ser
Phase
Total
Rounds
OMS Requirement
% Hits
Score
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
Phase 1a
40%
10
Phase 1b
60%
27
45
Phase 1c
10
60%
30
50
Phase 1d
40%
10
Phase 1e
60%
12
20
Phase 1f
10
60%
Pass
30
50
111
185
Phase 2a
40%
10
Phase 2b
60%
27
45
Phase 2c
10
60%
30
50
10
Phase 2d
10
60%
30
50
87
155
Pass
14-84
Assessment Details
Preliminary Zeroing Shoot
Phase. Check Zero
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Ammunition
1 Round
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Ammunition
9 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-85
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Ammunition
1 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Ammunition
4 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-86
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Fig 12 frame held.
Target/ Exposure
1 x 3 minute exposure
Followed 30 seconds later by
5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals.
Order Adopt the sitting or kneeling position,(when in position)
Load, ready, phase 1f watch and shoot
Instructions
Sniper fires 5 rounds at the initial exposure then 1 round at each of the
remaining 5 exposures.
Targets Up and Hold for the 3 min exposure then Fall when Hit.
Post Phase order Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear
(once clear) ease springs, pick up brass, await scores.
Ammunition
1 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Ammunition
9 Rounds
Fig 11 frame held.
Target/ Exposure
1 x 4 minute exposure
Followed 30 seconds later by
5 x 5 second exposures with irregular intervals.
14-87
Sniper fires 4 rounds at the initial exposure then 1 round at each of the
remaining 5 exposures.
Instructions
Targets Up and Hold for the 4 min exposure then Fall when Hit.
Post Phase order Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear
(once clear) ease springs, pick up brass, move to 900m, await
scores.
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Fig 11 frame held.
Target/ Exposure
1 x 4 minute exposure
Followed 30 seconds later by
5 x 5 second exposures with irregular intervals.
Order Adopt the prone position, load, ready, phase 2c, watch and
shoot.
Instructions
Sniper fires 5 rounds at the initial exposure then 1 round at each of the
remaining 5 exposures.
Targets Up and Hold for the 4 min exposure then Fall when Hit.
Post Phase order Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear
(once clear) ease springs, pick up brass, move to 800m, await
scores.
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Fig 11 frame held.
Target/ Exposure
1 x 4 minute exposure
Followed 30 seconds later by
5 x 5 second exposures with irregular intervals.
Order Adopt the prone position, load, ready, phase 2d, watch and
shoot.
Instructions
Sniper fires 5 rounds at the initial exposure then 1 round at each of the
remaining 5 exposures.
Targets Up and Hold for the 4 min exposure then Fall when Hit.
Post Phase order Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear
(once clear) ease springs, pick up brass, await scores.
14-88
Phase
Range/Target
Up
Down
Prelim
100 yds
Fig 12 with 1 x
25mm aiming mark
Start
05
0
10.05
1a
600 yds
Fig 12
Start
.05
0
3.06
1b
600 yds
Fig 12
Start
09
0
2.10
2.40
3.05
3.15
4.45
5.25
2.45
3.10
3.20
4.50
5.30
Start
19
0
2.20
2.51
3.35
4.35
5.05
5.55
2.56
3.41
4.40
5.10
6.00
1c
500 yds
Fig 12
Up and Hold
Fall whenHit
Up and Hold
Fall whenHit
1d
400 yds
Fig 14 window
Start
05
0
3.06
1e
400 yds
Fig 14 window
Start
09
49
0
20
1.00
1f
400 yds
Fig 12
Start
14
0
3.14
3.45
4.30
4.38
5.20
5.45
3.50
4.35
4.43
5.25
5.50
Fall whenHit
Start
.05
0
3.06
2a
1000 yds
Fig 11
Phase
Range/Target
Up and Hold
Timings
Up
Down
14-89
Phase
Range/Target
2c
900 yds
Fig 11
2d
14-90
800 yds
Fig 11
Timings
Up
Down
Start
.05
0
4.06
4.36
5.20
6.54
7.20
7.54
4.42
5.26
7.00
7.26
8.00
Start
.25
0
4.26
4.56
6.00
6.10
6.54
7.40
5.02
6.06
6.16
7.00
7.46
Up and Hold
Fall whenHit
Up and Hold
Fall whenHit